Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Baltimore, Maryland
Invitation for Bids
WILLIAM PRESTON LANE, JR. MEMORIAL BRIDGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................................I
INVITATION FOR BIDS ...................................................................................................... 1
KEY INFORMATION SUMMARY SHEET ...................................................................................................... 1
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................. 3
QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 4
PART A ................................................................................................................................. 5
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 6
GI-1 SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 6
GI-2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 7
GI-3 PROJECT TIME .......................................................................................................................................... 7
GI-4 PROCUREMENT OFFICER ....................................................................................................................... 7
GI-5 CONTRACT MANAGER ........................................................................................................................... 7
GI-6 PRE-BID MEETING AND SITE VISIT ..................................................................................................... 8
GI-7 QUESTIONS DUE DATE .......................................................................................................................... 8
GI-8 EMARYLAND MARKET PLACE ............................................................................................................. 8
GI-9 BIDDERS LIST .......................................................................................................................................... 9
GI-10 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 9
GI-11 BID DUE DATE AND SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 10
GI-12 REVISIONS TO THE IFB ....................................................................................................................... 11
GI-13 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................................... 11
GI-14 BID GUARANTY AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS........................................................................ 12
GI-15 ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER ...................................................................................................... 14
GI-16 VERIFICATION OF REGISTRATION AND TAX PAYMENT ............................................................ 14
GI17 ARREARAGES ...................................................................................................................................... 15
GI-18 BID/PROPOSAL AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................................... 15
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................... 68
SECTION 103 ENGINEERS OFFICE ........................................................................................................... 69
SECTION 109 CRITICAL PATH METHOD PROJECT SCHEDULE .......................................................... 73
SECTION 113 DIGITAL CAMERA ............................................................................................................... 74
SECTION 499 WORKING DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................... 76
SECTION 805 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS ........................................................................ 77
SECTION 809 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL ............................................................................................ 83
SECTION 810 ELECTRICAL CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS........................................................ 86
SECTION 811 ELECTRICAL HAND HOLES, MANHOLES, HANDBOXES, PULL AND JUNCTION
BOXES ...................................................................................................................................................... 91
SECTION 831 MISS UTILITY ....................................................................................................................... 94
SECTION 839 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND DATA CABLING ......................................................... 107
SECTION 840 FIBER OPTIC CABLES ........................................................................................................ 110
SECTION 841 - FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATIONS AND SPLICING ............................................... 114
SECTION 844 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS ............................................................................................ 121
SECTION 875 UTILITIES STATEMENT ................................................................................................... 124
NATIONAL COOPERATIVE HIGHWAY RESEARCH PROGRAM (NCHRP) REPORT 350 AND THE
MANUAL FOR ASSESSING SAFETY HARDWARE (MASH) IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
FOR DEVICES USED IN THE MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC ...... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
OCCUPYING WETLANDS ............................................................................................................................ 130
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY APPAREL POLICY ......................................................................................... 131
REQUIRED PERMITS .................................................................................................................................... 133
MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MDMUTCD) REQUIREMENTS ................. 134
ELECTRONIC DATA SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 135
APPENDIX 1 - ASBESTOS INSPECTION REPORT WILLIAM PRESTON LANE, JR. MEMORIAL BRIDGE
FACILITY .................................................................................................................................................. 141
BB-2829-000-006
eMM SOLICITATION:
MDJ0731025906
TITLE:
FACILITY:
COUNTY:
ADVERTISED:
April 8, 2016
PRE-BID MEETING:
PROCUREMENT OFFICER:
Janet Fleming
Phone # 410-537-7510
Fax # 410-537-7801
Email jfleming@mdta.state.md.us
PROJECT TIME:
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
1%
SBR:
PART A
The MDTA may change the Procurement Officer at any time by written notice to the
Contractor.
GI-5 CONTRACT MANAGER
The Contract Manager monitors the daily activities of the Contract and provides guidance to
the Contractor. The State Contract Manager is:
7
The MDTA may change the Contract Manager at any time by written notice to the
Contractor.
GI-6 PRE-BID MEETING AND SITE VISIT
A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on April 22, 2016, beginning at 10:00 am, Local Time,
Maryland Transportation Authority, William Preston Lane Mem. Bridge (WPL) Bay Bridge
Police and Automotive Building, 2nd Floor Conference Room, 881 Oceanic Drive,
Annapolis, MD 21409. Attendance at the Pre-Bid Conference is not mandatory, but all
interested Bidders are encouraged to attend to raise questions and/or issues of concern
regarding this IFB, gain an understanding of the bidding process, and facilitate better
preparation of their bids. In addition, attendance may facilitate the Bidders understanding of
the IFB requirements.
A Site Visit will be held immediately following the Pre-Bid Meeting. Attendance at the Site
Visit is not mandatory. All interested Bidders are encouraged to attend in order to become
familiar with the project environment.
It is the sole responsibility of the Bidders to familiarize themselves fully with the scope of
work and the contents of these specifications. Failure to attend the pre bid conference or site
visit does not relieve the successful Bidder from their obligations to comply with all aspects
of this bid package for the amount specified in their bid.
As promptly as feasible after the Pre-Bid Meeting, a written summary of the Meeting and all
questions and answers known will be distributed electronically via eMaryland Marketplace
at https://emaryland.buyspeed.com/bso/.
GI-7 QUESTIONS DUE DATE
Please submit all questions in writing to the Procurement Officer: Janet Fleming via email
at: MDTAPROCUREMENT@mdta.state.md.us. and cc: jfleming@mdta.state.md.us.
Questions will be received until April 29, 2016 @ 3:00 pm Local Time. Oral questions will
not be entertained. All questions and responses will be published as an Addendum to the
solicitation on eMM.
GI-8 eMARYLAND MARKET PLACE
If you need additional assistance, please contact the eMaryland Helpdesk at (410) 767-1492.
GI-10 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS
With the exception of questions received prior to the Questions Due date as indicated in GI
7, the MDTA will not accept bids, protests, notices of claim, or claims by any electronic
means (including by facsimile or email).
14
15
This Contract is subject to Executive Order 01.01.1995.19, July 17, 1995 (Code of
Fair Practices). This Contract is subject to the applicable provisions of Title 14,
Subtitle 3 of State Finance and Procurement Article 21.11.03, Minority Business
Enterprises Policies; and COMAR 21.11.04, Contractor Affirmative Action Program
Manual, MDTA; and the provisions of COMAR 11.01.10 which incorporates by
reference the Minority Business Enterprise Program Manual. Copies of the Minority
Business Enterprise Program Manual may be requested from the Maryland
Department of Transportation (MDOT), Office of Minority Business Enterprise
Office, located at 7201 Corporate Center Drive, Hanover, MD 21076 or can be found
on the MDOT website at
http://www.mdot.maryland.gov/Office%20of%20Minority%20Business%20Enterpri
se/Resources%20Information. This Contract is also subject to all applicable federal
and State laws and regulations pertaining to Minority Business Enterprise and
Affirmative Action.
AND
The gross sales of the wholesale operations of the business did not exceed an average of
$4,000,000 in its most recently completed three fiscal years.
The gross sales of the retail operations of the business did not exceed an average of
$3,000,000 in its most recently completed three fiscal years.
The gross sales of the manufacturing operations of the business did not exceed an average of
$2,000,000 in its most recently completed three fiscal years.
The gross sales of the service operations of the business did not exceed an average of
$10,000,000 in its most recently completed three fiscal years.
The gross sales of the construction operations of the business did not exceed an average of
$7,000,000 in its most recently completed three fiscal years.
The gross sales of the architectural and engineering services of the business did not exceed
an average of $4,500,000 in its most recently completed 3 fiscal years.
17
(2)
If the apparent awardee believes a full or partial waiver of the overall VSBE goal is
necessary, it must submit a fully documented waiver request that complies with COMAR
21.11.13.07; and
(3)
If the apparent awardee fails to return each completed document within the required time, the
Procurement Officer may determine that the apparent awardee is not responsible and therefore not
eligible for contract award.
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall:
1. Submit monthly to the MDTA a report listing any unpaid invoices, over 45 days old, received
from any VSBE subcontractor, the amount of each invoice and the reason payment has not been
made.
2. Include in its agreements with its VSBE subcontractors a requirement that those subcontractors
submit monthly to the MDTA a report that identifies the prime contract and lists all payments
received from Contractor in the preceding 30 days, as well as any outstanding invoices, and the
amount of those invoices.
3. Maintain such records as are necessary to confirm compliance with its VSBE participation
obligations. These records must indicate the identity of VSBE and non-VSBE subcontractors
employed on the contract, the type of work performed by each, and the actual dollar value of
work performed. Subcontract agreements documenting the work performed by all VSBE
participants must be retained by the Contractor and furnished to the Procurement Officer on
request.
4. Consent to provide such documentation as reasonably requested and to provide right-of-entry at
reasonable times for purposes of the States representatives verifying compliance with the
19
20
21
22
PART B
23
The last sentence of the first paragraph of TC-5.02, No work shall be started before receipt of the
Notice to Proceed shall not apply to the following:
After notification to the Contractor from the Authority that the Contractor is the apparent low
bidder, the Contractor will be permitted to provide a written request to the Engineer to submit
documentation for materials sources and working drawings for any items of work that have a long
lead time and could jeopardize the project schedule. Upon written approval from the Engineer the
Contractor may submit the applicable documentation to the Engineer.
Should the Contract not be awarded to the apparent low bidder who meets the requirements of the
Contract, GP-8.10 will apply for all costs accrued for the preparation and approval of the working
drawings and any resultant material purchase approved by the Engineer and steel fabricated in
conformance with the approved working drawings between the date the Contractor received notice
of apparent low bidder and the date of notice that the apparent low bidder will not be awarded this
Contract.
Should this Contract not be awarded to the apparent low bidder due to failure of the Contractor to
comply with all award and execution requirements, all costs accrued for the preparation of the
specific items and any resultant material purchased and steel fabrication shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Failure of the Contractor to submit the early submissions will not be basis for delaying issuance of
the Notice to Proceed or be considered a reason for a time extension.
SP 1-2 WORK HOURS
Normal work hours shall be Monday through Friday between 7:30 AM to 4:00 PM. Night time
only hours will be required for some tasks in facilities occupied by employees during normal
working hours.
Any work required to be performed at other than normal working hours (nights, holidays,
weekends, etc.) shall be taken into consideration by the Contractor when computing his bid. Extra
compensation shall not be allowed to the Contractor for any work performed at other than normal
working hours.
24
25
26
GENERAL PROVISIONS
27
District Engineer
Environmental Programs Division
District Office
Office of Structures
Office of Traffic & Safety
28
GP-1.05 DEFINITIONS
ADD: The following.
Highway Standards The official Book of Standards for Highway and Incidental
Structures, edited by the State Highway Administration, with the latest incorporated
revisions issued on or before the date of advertisement on the contract.
29
30
31
32
A. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with Authority contractors and any other
adjoining work performed by outside agency contractors. Such cooperation and coordination shall
include, and be not limited to, the following:
1. Arrangement, staging, and conduct of work;
2. Storage and disposal of materials, etc., in such a manner as to not interfere with, limit
access, or hinder the progress of the work being performed by other contractors.
Contiguous work shall be joined as required in the Contract Documents.
3. Keeping apprised of other contractors activities, sharing information, working
collaboratively, attending corridor coordination meetings and conforming to all other
activities requiring cooperation and coordination efforts between contractors as
identified in these special provisions.
B. The Authority shall have the right, at any time, to contract for and perform other work on, near,
over or under the work covered by this Contract. In addition, other work may be performed under
the jurisdiction of another Administration or State agency. In cases when a dispute arises among
contractors, the Authoritys decision shall be final and binding on the contractors. The Contractor
shall cooperate fully with such other contractors and carefully fit his own work to such other work
as may be directed by the Authority.
C. The Contractor agrees to make no claims against the Authority for any inconvenience, delay or
loss experienced by them because of the presence and operations of other contractors, except when
such a delay is not due to any fault or negligence of the Contractor. All such justifiable and
approved delays may be considered for an extension of time only in accordance with the
requirements of Section TC-5.05 of the Standard Specifications.
33
34
35
36
b)
Outline administrative responsibilities for implementing the Safety Plan, and identify
and define the personnel accountable for incident prevention. Incidents include, but
are not limited to, employee injuries, equipment and property damage, fires, and
injury to the public. Include the name of the Contractor's Primary Safety
Representative, delineating his/her authority to direct work stoppage and cause the
elimination or correction of hazardous conditions.
c)
Establish performance objectives for all line supervisors for the achievement of a
zero incident goal.
d)
Develop the means for coordinating and controlling work activities of contractors,
subcontractors, and suppliers.
e)
Provide for on-going safety inspections of work sites, material, and equipment to
ensure compliance with the Safety Plan. All Safety Plans shall include at a minimum
the requirements set forth in Appendix A, included herein.
37
The Contractor shall post the following in a jobsite location visible to all personnel:
i. Emergency procedures. ii. Emergency phone numbers. iii. Job safety and health
poster. iv. Notice of workers compensation carrier. v. OSHA 200 Summary (during
February of each year). vi. Location of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
documents.
b)
c)
d)
e)
Develop a Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for high-risk operations prior to their
commencement, and review specific JSA requirements with their employees. High
risk operations include such activities as shoulder or lane closure; any excavation
greater than 6 ft. in depth; pile driving; rebar placement; falsework erection; concrete
placements involving cranes or pumps; and setting structural steel or precast
elements, overhead sign structures, signals, high-mast lighting, etc. A copy of the
JSA form is herewith included in Appendix B. Copies of completed JSA forms shall
be kept on file at the Contractors field office and made available to the Engineer
upon request.
f)
Ensure that all subcontractor and suppliers are provided with a copy of Contractor's
project site-specific Safety Plan and are informed of their obligations with regard to
safety.
g)
38
i)
Employ any additional measures that are necessary for project safety.
1.4 Exemptions
The following are exempt from the requirements of providing a Safety Plan:
a)
b)
In the case of a joint venture, each joint venture partner must be ISO certified.
Should a Contractor or subcontractor lose the ISO certification during Contract
performance, the Contractor or subcontractor will lose the exemption. Once lost, an
exemption cannot be reinstated. In the event the Contractor or subcontractor loses the
exemption, the Contractor or subcontractor shall immediately submit the project sitespecific Safety Plan, in no case later than 15 calendar days from losing the ISO
certification.
c)
d)
If the Contractor is exempt and one or more of its subcontractors are non-exempt,
then each non-exempt subcontractor shall prepare and submit a Safety Plan that is
acceptable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall forward a copy of each
Contractor-approved subcontractor Safely Plan to the Department for information
and file, within thirty (30) calendar days of the Contractors issuance of Notice to
Proceed to the non-exempt subcontractor.
39
40
42
Activity: ___________________
POTENTIAL
SAFETY/HEALTH HAZARD
RECOMMENDED
CONTROL
Develop specific
Controls for each
potential hazard
EQUIPMENT TO BE
USED
EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
REQUIREMENTS
TRAINING
REQUIREMENTS
List equipment to be
used in the work
activity.
List training
requirements, including
hazard communication.
PRINCIPAL STEPS
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Hardware
Operating System
Internet Browser
Netscape Navigator / Communicator 4.7x (6.x and 7.x not currently supported).
Internet Access
Dictated by the Internet Browser: ensure the hardware meets minimum requirements
specified by the browser manufacturer.
Pop-up Blockers
Spyware
54
55
56
57
58
60
61
03/27/2013
64
65
66
67
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
68
103.03.06 Computer System. Furnish one desktop computers and one laptop computers, Printers
and or multifunction printers and other equipment as specified herein.
General Requirements.
(a) IBM compatible with an Intel Core i5 processor.
(b) Minimum hard drive storage of 500 GB (gigabyte).
(c) One CD-RW drive (re-writable CD-ROM). 16X Minimum speed.
(d) Operating System. Minimum Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition. The computer
system will not be acceptable unless all Microsoft Windows Critical Updates are installed.
(e) Printer.
When an Engineers Office is specified, furnish a color all-in-one laser
printer/scanner/copier/fax with at least 64 MB of RAM and meeting the following minimum
requirements:
(1) Input paper capacity of 150 sheets.
(2) Automatic document feed of 35 page capacity.
(3) Printer resolution up to 600 X 2400 dpi, and a print speed (color) of at least 15 ppm.
(4) Scanner resolution must be capable of 1200 x 2400 dpi optical. Built in Copier resolution
must be capable of up to 600 X 600 dpi. Copier speed of at least 15 ppm.
(5) Fax speed of at least 2 sec / page.
(6) For security reasons a printer with an internal hard drive installed is not allowed.
(f) Software. Supply all manuals, license numbers, software key numbers, and/or software on
original disks for retention in the Engineers Office or Administration facility for the duration
of the Contract.
69
72
DELETE: The last sentence of the first paragraph Utilize CPM softwarewith Primavera
Project Planner. in its entirety.
INSERT: Utilize CPM software that generates output files compatible with the latest
version of Oracle/Primavera version P6 or newer.
73
06-02-11
(2)
(3)
(4)
2 GB SmartMedia Card or memory stick with all items required for downloading
(5)
(b) Color Printer. The printer shall have at least 8 MB RAM, 2400 x 1200 dpi resolution, a
color print speed of 13 ppm, and a duty cycle of 5000 pages/month.
113.03 CONSTRUCTION. Not applicable.
113.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. The number of digital cameras required for this
project is one. The digital camera and printer will not be measured but the cost will be incidental to
the Contract price for the Engineers Office item. If an item for Engineers Office is not specified,
payment will be incidental to the payment for Mobilization. In the absence of either item, payment
will be incidental to the other items specified in the Contract Documents. If a digital camera or
printer becomes defective, is stolen, or for any other reason does not function as intended, it shall be
replaced with an approved camera or printer at no additional cost to the Authority. A
nonfunctioning or stolen camera or printer shall be replaced within 5 days after the Engineer
notifies the Contractor.
Ownership of the cameras and printer will remain with the Contractor. The Authority assumes
neither responsibility nor liability for the condition of the camera when returned.
74
75
ADD: The following after the first paragraph, When the Contract...to that firm.
Working drawings for this Contract shall be submitted electronically as outlined in TC-4.01
Shop Plans and Working Drawings.
454
455
DELETE: The first paragraph on this page, The Contractor, fabricator...for primary
review." in its entirety.
INSERT: The following.
The Contractor, fabricator, or supplier shall submit all working drawings, etc. for approval
in accordance with, and as outlined in TC-4.01.
455
455
76
04-06-07
CONSTRUCTION
78
79
80
81
82
950.17
809.03 CONSTRUCTION
CHANGE: Text which reads: reads CAUTION: SHA ELEC-TRICAL LINE BURIED
BELOW, repeated every 36 in.
TO: reads BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE, or other approved message, repeated every 36
inches and buried to a depth of at least 6 and not more than 12 below finished grade. The tape
shall be terminated above grade and shall be secured to the same conduit or cable it is identifying.
Securing shall be by sunlight resistant cable tie or other approved means. If terminating at a
handhole or manhole the detector tape shall be brought 6 above grade along side the handhole or
manhole. Trenching and backfilling shall be performed according to the Maryland Standard MD
809.01 and as approved by the Engineer.
ADD: the following paragraphs before the Cable Treatment paragraph:
"Miss Utility". Where trenching and backfilling for the placement of conduits, splice boxes,
handholes and handboxes is required, the contractor must contact "Miss Utility. "Miss Utility"
shall be notified 72 hours in advance of any work under the contract and test pit all marked
locations for exact position of cables, conduits, and other underground utilities.
Depth. Unless otherwise specified on the contract drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth
such that all conduits, wires, and duct cable in trench is at a finished elevation at least 24 below the
final grade. Where trenches are placed on slopes, cover shall be measured from the outside jacket of
the duct cable or conduit to the nearest top of grade. This measurement will generally be
perpendicular to the slope of the grade.
Where proper trench depth cannot be obtained, and improper depth presents a hazard to the cables,
or conduit, the Engineer may direct that lengths of 4 galvanized rigid steel conduit be installed as a
sleeve. The sleeve length shall be in intervals of 10. The contractor must bend conduit to conform
to the line and grade of the trench. Additionally, the Engineer may require concrete cover in shallow
trench, on slopes, or where other conditions indicate the need.
83
85
DESCRIPTION
DELETE: The following text from the paragraph: loop detector wires and leads and micro-loop
probe sets.
810.02
MATERIALS
950.16
CONSTRUCTION
86
Voltage
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
60 to 240
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
277 to 300
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray
Green
300 to 600
Brown with
Violet stripe
Orange with
Violet stripe
Yellow with
violet stripe
Gray with
violet stripe
Green
INSERT: The following to the end of the first paragraph of section 810.03.03.
Any preassembled cable duct that has been kinked shall be considered damaged. The kinked portion
and 10 feet to either side of the kink must be cut out and removed.
DELETE: The third sentence, When specified, lighting cableand hand holes.
DELETE: The last two sentences, Provide 8 in. drip loopsterminal blocks.
DELETE: Paragraphs 810.03.05, 810.03.08, and 810.03.09 in their entirety.
INSERT: The following.
810.03.05 Identification Tags. Furnish and install circuit wiring identification tags in all manholes,
handholes, junction boxes, control cabinets, wire troughs, and service pedestals. Furnish and install
circuit wiring identification tags every 50 feet in cable trays. For roadway and sign lighting circuits,
power circuits for devices, indicate the panel and circuit number(s) of the cable (e.g: L-3,5,7; or P2). For fiber optic, data, telco, or other communications cables consult engineer for labeling text.
Attach all identification tags with two wire ties.
810.03.08 Connector Kits. Furnish and install connector kits as required for the types of cables
specified in the Contract Documents and in conformance with manufacturers recommendations.
All breakaway devices (light standards, signs, etc.) that have electrical connections shall utilize
breakaway connector kits, type I, II, III, or IV as necessary. Unless otherwise specified on the plans
all connections within the base of light standards and sign structures that support roadway or sign
lighting shall utilize breakaway connector kits, type I, II, III, or IV.
In underground manholes, handholes, and similar environments utilize splices as specified in
section 950.14.04. All manufacturers instructions and guidelines shall be followed for installation
87
88
, or
Where the Contractor requested that the area be marked at least 72 hours prior to
digging and damaged cable is the result of not being marked, or being marked more
than 4-0, measured horizontally, from the marks, the kits shall be paid per each
complete and in-place.
(b)
Where the cables are marked, and within 4-0 of the mark, measured horizontally, the
kits will be considered incidental to other items.
(c)
Where the cables are unmarked and the Contractor did not request marking, or where
the Contractor did not maintain the marking, the kits will be considered incidental to
other items.
90
DESCRIPTION
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION
91
(c) Proposed handholes for fiber optic cables shall be spaced a maximum of 500 feet apart from
each other. A minimum of 50 feet and a maximum of 100 feet of fiber optic cable shall be
coiled in each hand box to facilitate future movement and splices.
(d) For fiber optic cable installation, a splice box shall be placed at the end of each cable reel.
(e) Proposed handholes for electrical cables shall be spaced a maximum of 500 feet apart from
each other. For wire sizes #6AWG and smaller, a minimum of 20 feet and a maximum of
30 feet of electrical cable shall be coiled in each hand box to facilitate future movement and
splices. For wire sizes #4AWG to #1/0, coil wire around interior wall of handbox at least 1
full turn for slack.
(f) Handhole and manhole enclosure covers shall have an identifying mark or logo that
prominently identifies the function of the enclosure. Boxes with Electrical (>60V) shall be
labeled ELECTRIC. Boxes with only fiber optic cables shall be labeled FIBER. Other
custom labels may be indicated on the plans and within the schedule of prices. Handhole
and manhole enclosure covers shall require the use of tools to open, or they shall weigh over
45 kg (100 lb.). Metal covers and other exposed conductive surfaces shall be bonded in
accordance with NFPA 70 Section 250.92(A) if the conductors in the handhole or manhole
are service conductors or in accordance with NFPA 70 Section 250.96(A) if the conductors
in the handhole or manhole are feeder or branch-circuit conductors.
(g) Install handholes, manholes, and other underground enclosures such that the lid is flush with
finished grade. E.g: If the grade is sloped the lid (and box) shall match the slope of the
grade.
92
93
2 of 13
(d) Applying for ticket by Phone Call:
1. When applying to Miss Utility for a utility ticket by phone the contractor shall provide to the
Call Center the MDTA Contract Number in place of the MDOT Permit number. (note: the
MDTA contract number is considered to be the MDOT number)
2 The contractor shall then inform the Call Center that the excavation is on a Maryland State
Right of Way and request the ticket be sent to the MDTA- Maryland Transportation
Authority.
Further information can be found at the Miss Utility web site.
www.missutility.net/Maryland/
For questions regarding MDTA Miss Utility and SHA Miss Utility requirements, property Right of
Way and utility locates contact Bill Pross 410-537-7829email wpross@mdta.state.md.us
95
Rev. 3-3-2016
96
Rev 11-4-15
97
Rev 11-4-15
Diagram 3) MD Agency Controlling Property or State Road Right of Way box: You must select the state
agency controlling the property/road right of way where the excavation is being performed. In the example
work is being performed on MDTA road right of way.
98
Rev 11-4-15
Diagram 4) MDOT Permit box: You must insert the MDTA contract number in place of an MDOT permit
number to complete filling in the ticket. The MDTA contract number is considered the MDOT permit
number.
99
Rev 11-4-15
100
Rev 11-4-15
(CFMO)
Chief Facility Maint. Officer
(STSS)
Skilled Trade Specialist Supervisior
Jeff Robson
Office: 410-537-1269
Mobile: 443-829-1058
Andrew Coroneos
Office: 410-537-1274
Mobile: 443-829-4945
Baltimore Harbor
Tunnel
(BHT)
Jeff Alter
Office: 410-537-1315
Mobile: 443-829-1760
George Youngbar
Office: 410-537-1323
Mobile: 443-506-7100
James Quinn
Office: 410-537-7673
Mobile: 443-324-6651
John F. Kennedy
Highway, Maint. I
(JFK - I)
Dan Sawyers
Office: 410-537-1118
Mobile: 443-829-1703
John F. Kennedy
Highway, Maint. II
(JFK - II)
Dan Sawyers
Office: 410-537-1118
Mobile: 443-829-1703
Thomas J. Hatem
Mem. Bridge
(TJH)
Dan Sawyers
Office: 410-537-1118
Mobile: 443-829-1703
Scott Still
Office: 410-537-6651
Mobile: 443-829-1710
Richard Holthaus
Office: 410-537-6669
Mobile: 443-790-0517
Tommy Crouch
Office: 410-537-6818
Mobile: 443-677-7321
Melvin Prout
Office: 410-537-6921
Mobile: 443-829-1713
Intercounty Connector
MD 200 (ICC)
Ted Williams
Office: 410-537-6929
Mobile: 443-790-9316
James Davies
Office: 410-537-6927
Mobile: 443-630-9472
101
Rev 11-4-15
831.03.08 OTHER MDOT STATE AGENCY RIGHT OF WAY. The Contractor shall obtain Miss
Utility locate clearance tickets from the Maryland State Highway Administration (SHA) or other pertinent
state agency when the work requires the Contractor to perform excavation in SHA right of way or other
pertinent state agency right of way.
(a) The Maryland Transportation Authority (MDTA) is conjoined with the State Highway
Administration (SHA) at numerous interchanges throughout the State of Maryland. As example these
locations include but are not limited to I-95 at MD 24, I-895 at I-95, I-695 at I-95, ICC/MD200 at I95 etc. These conjoined interchanges, for both the MDTA and SHA agencies, will most likely
contain each agencies underground electric, communication and/or fiber optic facilities within their
respective conjoined Rights of Way. In these conjoined areas, SHA may have underground utilities
within MDTA right of way and likewise MDTA may have underground utilities within SHA right of
way.
103
Rev 11-4-15
For questions regarding all MDTA roadways and utility locates on MDTA right of way and SHA
right of way, contact Bill Pross 410-537-7829.
For questions regarding utility locates on SHA right of way, contact SHA Miss Utility 443-5725264.
Information pertaining to Miss Utility Maryland Department of Transportation (MDOT)
requirements and Maryland State law can be found at the Miss Utility web site.
http://www.missutility.net/maryland/
105
Rev 11-4-15
106
Rev 11-4-15
DESCRIPTION.
839.01.01 This work shall include furnishing and installing telecommunications and data cabling.
839.02
MATERIALS
952
CONSTRUCTION
839.03.01 All cables installed in this project shall be permanently marked and labeled at both ends
of the cable and inside all handboxes, pull boxes, splice boxes, and handholes.
839.03.02 All cables shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006 Standard
for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling.
839.03.03 Splicing.
(a) Patch cables shall not have splices.
(b) Distribution cables from outlet to patch panel shall not have splices.
(c) Category 5e and Category 6 distribution cables for networks shall not have splices.
(d) Cables for telecommunications, serial data (RS422, RS485), or other communications may
have splices in field runs greater than 1000 at the end of reels and as specified on the
plans.
839.03.04 Before any cable installation is performed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
copy of the cable manufacturer's recommended and maximum pulling tensions for each cable size
and type.
(a) These pulling tensions shall be specified for pulling from the cable's outer jacket.
(b) Included with these pulling tensions shall be a list of the minimum allowable cable
bending radius and the cable manufacturer's approved pulling lubricants and guidelines for
their application. Only these lubricants will be permitted.
(c) Transportation and Handling of Cables. Cables shall be packaged and stored on original
manufacturer provided spools or reels. Each reel shall contain only one continuous length
of cable. Labels shall be attached to the reel showing length, cable identification name and
107
The applied tension shall not exceed the manufacturers specifications. A copy of the
manufacturers pulling specifications, requirements, and/or guidelines shall be available at
the site during the pulling operation. The project inspector shall have access to the pulling
guidelines as needed to check compliance.
(g) The central strength member and the aramid yarn shall be directly attached to the pulling
eye. "Basket Grip" type attachments to the outer jacket of the cable shall not be permitted.
A breakaway swivel shall be used on all pulls.
839.03.09 25 of slack cable shall be coiled in each manhole and handhole, unless directed
otherwise by the engineer.
839.04
All pay items shall include all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to furnish and install, test,
mark and label a complete, operational, and acceptable system as specified herein and as shown on
the plans. Payment of items shall include all testing and guarantee required by the specifications and
special provisions. Linear foot items shall be measured to include the linear feet of cable installed,
complete, in-place, and accepted, including the slack cable; but shall not include waste cable and
unused cables.
In addition, the following services/work shall be incidental to the listed pay item(s):
Cables shall be paid per linear foot, by type of cable. Typical items would be Linear Feet of
category 5e cable and Linear Feet of category 6 cable, and Linear Feet of 25 pair gel-filled,
armored telecommunications cable. The slack cable shall be measured and paid at the same linear
foot price.
109
951
840.02.01 All fiber optic cables installed out of doors shall be rated for outdoor use. Fiber optic
cables installed in the ventilation shafts of the tunnels shall be rated for outdoor use and be plenum
(OFNP) rated. Fiber optic cables used inside building shall be plenum rated (OFNP) unless
specifically noted in the plans.
840.02.02 Fiber Optic cables shall be gel-filled or tight buffered as specified on the plans. Where
no specification is provided, cable shall be gel-filled loose tube type.
840.03 CONSTRUCTION
840.03.01 All fiber optic cables installed in this project shall be permanently marked and labeled at
both ends of the cable and inside all handboxes, pull boxes, splice boxes, and handholes.
840.03.02 All fiber optic cables shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling.
840.03.03 All exposed fiber optic cables installed in a building shall be marked and labeled every
50 feet.
840.03.04 Splicing Reels of Cable. The method of joining two reels of fiber optic cable shall be
fusion splicing all trunk cable fibers of one reel to the corresponding fibers in the second reel. All
splices for joining two fiber reels of trunk cable together shall be made in the splice boxes at the
locations shown on the plans, approximately 6000 feet between splice boxes. In other words, when
a reel runs out of cable, any excess beyond the planned termination point shall be cut off and
disposed of by the Contractor. The splice joining the two cable reels shall be made in the splice box
that contains the cable-to-cable splice. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to calculate the cost
to join fiber optic reels on the project based upon the reel lengths that the Contractor orders. Where
interconnect system length permits, the Contractor can avoid the cost of joining cable reels together
by ordering a single reel of sufficient length to extend from one end of project to the other.
840.03.05 Before any fiber-optic cable installation is performed, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a copy of the cable manufacturer's recommended and maximum pulling tensions for each
cable size and type.
110
The applied tension shall not exceed the manufacturers specifications. A copy of the
manufacturers pulling specifications, requirements, and/or guidelines shall be available at
the site during the pulling operation. The project inspector shall have access to the pulling
guidelines as needed to check compliance.
(g) The central strength member and the aramid yarn shall be directly attached to the pulling
eye. "Basket Grip" type attachments to the outer jacket of the cable shall not be permitted.
A breakaway swivel shall be used on all pulls.
840.03.11 50 of slack fiber shall be coiled in each manhole and handhole, unless directed
otherwise by the engineer.
840.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
All pay items shall include all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to furnish and install, test,
mark and label a complete, operational, and acceptable system as specified herein and as shown on
the plans. Payment of items shall include all testing and guarantee required by the specifications and
special provisions. Linear foot items shall be measured to include the linear feet of cable installed,
complete, in-place, and accepted, including the slack cable; but shall not include waste cable and
unused cables.
In addition, the following services/work shall be incidental to the listed pay item(s):
113
115
All cables shall have ST connectors installed prior to testing. All testing, for purposes of
acceptance of the system, shall be conducted on fully installed and assembled fiber optic
cables.
116
Upon completion of testing, replace or repair any failed cable(s) with a new fiber or cable,
and test the new cable to demonstrate acceptability.
(c)
Insertion loss testing shall be performed and recorded with Optical Loss Test Sets (i.e.,
Light Source and Power Meter) following Method B procedure (i.e., One Cable
Reference) in TIA 526-14A or Method 1A procedure (i.e., One Cable Reference) in TIA
526-7. These tests shall be measured in dB.
(d)
Contractor shall record the linear numbers at each end of a fiber optic cable under test. If
the cable contains splices, the linear numbers closest to the splice point shall also be
recorded. These numbers along with a clear definition of the location they were recorded
shall be transmitted along with the OLTS and OTDR test results.
(e)
These tests shall use 850 nm and 1300 nm light sources for multimode fiber and 1310 and
1550 nm for single mode fiber.
(f)
Tests shall be documented for all wavelengths per fiber type (MMF or SMF) as noted
above.
(g)
Test results shall be documented on paper and stored on a computer diskette and shall be
turned over to the electrical inspector after testing is complete. Attachment 841-A to this
Section shows a sample fiber optic test report. Insertion loss measurements recorded and
printed by the OLTS is the format preferred over manual records. Results of insertion loss
testing and OTDR traces event tables shall be submitted along with paper and electronic
formats of cable manufacturers factory testing documentation, cable end point linear
numbers, splicing diagrams (i.e., matrices), and other diagrams and data to aid in the
Engineers understanding of the results submitted for review.
(h)
An optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) approved in advance by the Engineer shall
be used to conduct testing. The OTDR shall be calibrated to cables optical fiber index of
refraction found on the manufacturers data sheet provided at cable delivery. Properly
trained technicians shall conduct tests. Documentation of training or certification shall be
provided to the Engineer.
(i)
All OTDR traces shall maximize both the vertical and horizontal scales to the greatest
extent possible and still fit the entire trace on the screen. The minimum width and height
of an OTDR trace diagram in native format on a letter sized paper shall be 2.85 by 2.25
inches.
(j)
A cable segment shall be deemed a failure if the total loss exceeds the calculated loss for
that length of cable as indicated in Attachment 841-A. A cable segment shall fail if any
individual splice loss is greater than 0.3dB, or if any mated connector pair loss is greater
than 0.75dB, or if there is any point loss (over less than 1 foot of cable) of more than
1.0dB.
117
After the circuit test, a functional test shall be performed. This test shall consist of
allowing the system to operate as normal for 30 consecutive days. Any failures shall be
repaired by the Contractor at his own expense, and the test restarted.
118
Fiber Cable:
Location (A):
Location (B):
119
Job No.:
Sheath ID:
Note:
Test Date:
Location A:
Location B:
Cable Length
Strand No.
Feet
Check One:
850 NM MM
1310 NM SM
Acceptable Loss:
___________dB
Cable Length
Check One:
1300 NM MM
1550 NM SM
Acceptable Loss:
___________dB
Trace ID
B to A (dB)
Trace ID
Fiber ID
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
White
Red
Black
Yellow
10
Violet
11
Rose
12
Aqua
Strand No.
Feet
A to B (dB)
A to B (dB)
Trace ID
B to A (dB)
Trace ID
Fiber ID
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
White
Red
Black
Yellow
10
Violet
11
Rose
12
Aqua
Date:
120
123
(a)
The Contractor shall contact MISS UTILITY 1-800-257-7777 in accordance with the
Miss Utilities Special Provision included within these Contract Documents.
(b)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the locating of all existing utilities and their safety.
Should any existing utilities be damaged or destroyed due to the operations of the
Contractor, the damaged or destroyed components shall be immediately replaced or
repaired as necessary to restore the utility to a satisfactory operating condition. These
repairs or replacements shall be at no additional expense to the MDTA or the owner of the
utility. In the event of damage to any existing utility while under construction, please refer
to the proceeding Emergency Utility Contact Information.
(d)
124
03-02-11
Name
Level 3 Communication
Fiber Optic Cable
Emergency Number
Comments
877-366-8344
(877-dont dig)
First Response
Jody Williams
202-369-5470
First Response
Rick Miller
702-888-7568
Second Response
Primary :
Office: 410-747-8590
1) Ray
Edwards
2) Paul
Runion
Office: 410-582-5690
Cell: 443-506-4035
Office: 410-747-8590
Cell: 443-604-8158
Cell/Pager: 443-3659826
410-321-2800
Pager: 410-307-2624
Nextel Direct;
164*75*1654
SHA Lighting
Les Towsend
Contact State
AOC
(Advanced
Operations
Center)
John
Lohmeyer
410-537-1233
410-537-1101(O)
443-802-7539(C)
Richard Wolf
410-537-8041(O)
443-324-3470(C)
Gary Jackson
410-537-7513(O)
443-324-6660(C)
Benjamin
Gilmore
410-537-6807(O)
443-915-7789(C)
125
Comcast
Ricky
De Grafenreid
410-295-8157(O)
443-468-4545(C)
Don Smith
410-537-6934(O)
443-829-5075(C)
Response Call
Center
410-649-4944
BGE - Gas
410-685-0123
410-685-0123
410-685-0123
Verizon
Maint.
Center
866-481-0100
Bureau of
Utilities
410-887-7415
Utility Maint.
Division
410-396-7870
Utility Maint.
Division
410-396-7870
Pepco
John
Koroma
202-388-2632
Washington Gas
Theresa
Curtis
703-750-5816
Transcontinental Gas
1-800-440-8475
Colombia Gas
1-800-853-7191
Washington Suburban
Sanitary Commission
Marci
Tucker
301-206-8577
Delmarva Power
1-800-898-8042
1-800-375-7117
410-638-3285
Wastewater
410-996-6260
Bureau of
Utilities
410-222-7500
126
Bureau of
Utilities
410-880-5822
410-313-4401
Water / Sewer
410-758-0920
410-643-3535
Utilities and
Water
301-609-7400
301-258-6370
240-777-0311
301-883-5600
(c)
127
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
1 of 2
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
NOTICE TO ALL HOLDERS OF THIS CONTRACT DOCUMENT
NATIONAL COOPERATIVE HIGHWAY RESEARCH PROGRAM (NCHRP) REPORT 350
AND THE MANUAL FOR ASSESSING SAFETY HARDWARE (MASH)
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE FOR DEVICES USED IN THE MAINTENANCE OF
TRAFFIC
Except as otherwise specified in this Section, all items for the maintenance of traffic, including
those listed under the following categories, shall be crashworthy in conformance with Level 3 or other
Level as specified by the Engineer in conformance with the safety crash testing and performance criteria
published in the National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350,
Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features or the Manual
for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH). When conformance with NCHRP Report 350 or MASH is
required, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the manufacturers certifications that the devices
comply with the specified criteria.
Unless specifically waived by an attachment to these Contract Provisions, devices must be
approved by the Office of Traffic and Safety.
Category 1 Devices
These devices are cones, tubular markers, flexible delineator posts, and drums, all without any
accessories or attachments, which are used for channelization and delineation.
Category 2 Devices
These devices are Type I, II, and III barricades; portable sign supports with signs; intrusion alarms;
and drums, vertical panels, and cones, all with accessories or attachments.
Category 3 Devices
(a) Truck Mounted Attenuators (TMAs) and Trailer Truck Mounted Attenuators (TTMAs).
(b) Temporary Barrier.
(1) Concrete Barrier.
(2) Traffic Barrier W Beam and Water Filled Barrier.
(3) Steel/Aluminum Barrier.
(c) Temporary End Treatments.
Category 4 Devices
These devices are area lighting supports, arrow panels, and portable variable message signs that are
usually portable or trailer-mounted.
128
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
2 of 2
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE TO
CONFORM TO NCHRP REPORT 350
CRITERIA
CATEGORY 1
Cones, tubular markers, flexible delineator posts,
and drums (all without any accessories or
attachments)
CATEGORY 2
Type I, II, and III barricades; portable signs supports
All devices shall conform to NCHRP
with signs; intrusion alarms; and drums, vertical
Report 350 or MASH criteria.
panels, and cones (all with accessories or
attachments)
CATEGORY 3
(a) Truck Mounted Attenuators (TMAs); Trailer
Truck Mounted Attenuators (TTMAs)
(b) Temporary Barriers
(1) Concrete Barrier
(2) Traffic Barrier W Beam and Water Filled
Barrier
(3) Steel/Aluminum Barrier
(c) Temporary End Treatments
CATEGORY 4
Portable trailer mounted devices including area
lighting supports, arrow panels, and changeable
message signs
129
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
1 of 1
OCCUPYING WETLANDS
The Contractor is hereby alerted to the importance of preserving wetland areas. The Administration,
in conjunction with the various environmental agencies, has developed these Contract Documents so as
to minimize or eliminate disturbance and damage to existing wetland areas. In order to accomplish
this, the following must be rigidly adhered to:
(a) Prior to performing any work on the project, the areas of wetland will be identified and marked as
directed by the Administration. All personnel of the Contractor or sub-contractors shall be
alerted to these designated areas.
(b) The Contractor or sub-contractors shall not impact any wetland or waterway, whether it be
permanently or temporarily unless otherwise stipulated in the permit application and approved
as an authorized action by the appropriate regulatory agency. No fill shall be placed in these
areas without a permit.
(c) If a Contractor or sub-contractor has to impact a wetland or waterway that is not covered by
an existing wetland permit, they shall immediately notify the Engineer. The Engineer will
notify the Environmental Programs Division to determine the extent of any permit
modification. At that time the Environmental Programs Division will request a permit
modification or submit a permit application.
(d) If the Contractor impacts any wetland or waterway for which they do not have a wetland
permit, they shall be responsible for restoring the wetland areas and possibly mitigating the
wetland impacts to the full satisfaction of the environmental agencies, which could include
monetary compensation.
(e) The cost of restoration and mitigation of the impacted areas shall be at no additional cost to
the Administration.
The importance of not abusing the wetland areas cannot be overemphasized. Abuse of wetland areas
could jeopardize the operation of the total Contract and could be cause for a shut-down. If a shut-down
occurs because of the Contractor's failure to secure the required permits (i.e. the Contractors method
of work includes impacts not approved by previously acquired permits), the Contractors negligence or
operations, all costs and damages to the Contractor and to the State will be at no additional cost to the
Administration. Noncompliance with these requirements will not be considered for an extension of
Contract time.
130
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
1 of 2
NOTICE TO ALL HOLDERS OF THIS CONTRACT DOCUMENT
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY APPAREL POLICY
BACKGROUND. Research indicates that high visibility garments have a significant impact on
the safety of employees who work on highways and rights-of-way. In addition, high visibility
garments may help to prevent injuries and accidents and to make highway workers more visible to
the motoring public, which ultimately improves traffic safety.
STATEMENT OF POLICY.
(a) The High Visibility Safety Apparel Policy provides a standardized apparel program.
(b) The program seeks to improve the visibility of all persons who work on Administration
highways and rights-of-way.
(c) All apparel shall contain the appropriate class identification label.
(d) Compliance with this policy is retroactive and becomes effective immediately. All affected
employees shall receive high visibility apparel awareness training.
APPLICABILITY. This policy applies to all Administration employees and all other persons
who work on Administration highways and rights-of-way. All workers shall wear, at a minimum,
Class 2 ANSI/ISEA 107/2004 apparel.
(a) For Administration employees, this apparel shall have a fluorescent yellow-green background
material color and be the outermost garment worn.
(b) Retro-reflective material color for Administration employee apparel shall be silver or white
and be visible at a minimum distance of 1,000 feet. The retro-reflective safety apparel shall
be designed to clearly recognize and differentiate the wearer from the surrounding work
environment. The retro-reflective material may be contrasted by fluorescent orange
background material not exceeding one and one half inches on either side of the retroreflective material.
(c) For non-Administration employees, this apparel shall be either fluorescent orange-red or
fluorescent yellow-green background material color and be the outermost garment worn.
(d) Retro-reflective material color for non-Administration employee apparel shall either be
orange, yellow, white, silver, yellow-green, or a fluorescent version of these colors, and be
visible at a minimum distance of 1,000 feet. The retro-reflective safety apparel shall be
designed to clearly recognize and differentiate the wearer from the surrounding work
environment.
131
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
2 of 2
REFERENCES.
(a) ANSI/ISEA 107/2004 standard American National Safety Institute/International Safety
Equipment Association
(b) MUTCD 2003 Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices - Sections 6D.03B and 6E.02
(c) Visibility Research The VCTR 1989 report concludes that fluorescent colors, when
compared with non-fluorescent colors, enhance the daytime conspicuity of worker clothing.
DEFINITIONS.
(a) Apparel The outermost high-visibility garment worn by employees who work on
Administration highways and rights-of-way.
(b) Highways All roads owned by the Maryland Department of Transportation and maintained
by the Administration.
(c) High Visibility The ability for workers to be distinguishable as human forms to be seen, day
and night, at distances that allow equipment operators and motorists to see, recognize, and
respond.
132
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
1 of 1
REQUIRED PERMITS
Application has been made for all permits necessary for the construction of the project. The
status of these permits is as follow:
1. Maryland Department of the Environment, Non-tidal Wetlands Waterways
Division & U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (Joint Permit)
No MDE nontidal or tidal wetlands/waterways or USACE permits are required.
The Contractor shall comply with all provisions and/or restrictions contained within the
permits with the exception as noted above. Failure to receive any of the above outstanding
permits may result in a delay in the Bid opening date or Notice to Proceed date.
133
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
(NCHRP) REPORT 350 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
1 of 1
NOTICE TO ALL HOLDERS OF THIS CONTRACT DOCUMENT
MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MdMUTCD)
REQUIREMENTS
The 2011 Maryland Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MdMUTCD) is the legal State
standard for traffic control devices. All traffic control devices (temporary or permanent) utilized on
MDTA projects shall be in conformance with the requirements provided in the 2011 Edition of the
MDTAs MdMUTCD for Streets and Highways.
134
Contract submissions that shall comply with the following electronic data submission requirements for inclusion in the
GIS system are the following:
Submission Title
Submission Description
2.0 Overview
MDTA currently utilizes an Enterprise Geographic Information System (GIS) application which hosts its own
data (imagery, terrain and property data), thus providing a fast, easy-to-use geovisualization tool for navigating GIS
data.
The MDTA Enterprise GIS application currently uses the following software:
Windows 2003
It is essential that the datasets be thoroughly and accurately documented to ensure the integrity of the
information being included and presented via the MDTA GIS system. All data that is required to be submitted in this
format to be included in the MDTA GIS system shall be accompanied with GIS Deliverable Form (Attachment A) and
135
2.
SDE.CATEGORY_DESCRIPTION_ORGANIZATION_FILE TYPE.
Example. SDE.UTIL_FIBER_MDTA_LINE.
If layer does not display correctly when brought into Google Earth, set projection to
GCS_WGS_1984.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure that there is only one feature class for a single type of data with a Facility column in the attribute
table to designate the facility associated with the feature, as opposed to separate feature classes for every
single facility.
136
All individual links to the documents / pages in the document should be preserved and working
7.
Symbology colors should remain the same in the map as well as in the layer category
137
Title:____________________________________________
Title # if applicable:________________________________
MDTA Contract Number:
Title of Deliverable: _______________________________________________________
Reference Section # ______________________
ID
1
2
3
__________________________________
138
Keyword
Time
Period
Status
Citation
of
Content
Contractor
Point of Contact
Use
Access
Constraint Constr
s
aints
Description
Section
Field
Abstract
Purpose
Supplemental Information
Access Constraints
Description
A brief statement describing what the data set is comprised of.
Summary discussing why the data set was developed. (Project
initiatives.)
Source Scale Denominator and any additional descriptive
information about the data set that may not be suitable for the
abstract and purpose.
Restrictions and legal prerequisites for accessing the data. This
is to protect privacy and intellectual property.
Use Constraints
The name of the individual who is the primary contact for the
dataset.
Organization
Position
Contact Phone Number
Contact e-mail address
Contact Instruction
Address Type
Street Address
City
State
Postal Code
Country
Originator
Publication Date
Calendar Date
Date that the data was collected. Could also be a range of dates
Basis for time period of content. (Publication Date, Ground
Condition)
State of the data set. (Complete, In Work, or Planning Stages)
How often changes or updates are made. (Monthly, Annually,
Bi-weekly, Continually, None planned)
ISO category (see list below, most likely transportation) and
additional words or phrase that describes the data set for
database search.
Geographic name of the location of the data set
Correctness Reference
Progress
Maintenance and Update
Frequency
Theme Keyword
Place Keyword
139
Dataset Information
[Contractor Identifies]
Contract No. ____________
[Submission Description]
N/A
N/A
Contract No. _________ Manager
Contractor
Metadata Contact
Metada
ta Dates
Section
Field
Metadata Date
Metadata
Review Date
Contact Person
Organization
Position
Contact Phone
Number
Contact e-mail
address
Contact
Instruction
Address Type
Street Address
City
State
Postal Code
Country
Description
Date that metadata was created.
Date that metadata was last reviewed.
Person that created the metadata.
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TECHNICAL SECTIONS
205
206
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 003129 - HVAC SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Record keeping is an essential element of the Contract. The Contractor shall maintain
detailed records on the amount of refrigerant recovered, the amount of refrigerant added
and a complete listing of all work performed during demolition and installation of
HVAC Systems. Contractor shall be provided a copy of the MDTA HVAC SOP (SOPS-ENVF-A-0009) that documents how refrigerants are to be reclaimed and managed.
1.3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. All HVAC work performed by the Contractor shall comply with Section 608 of the
Clean Air Act.
B. Intentional venting of Ozone Depleting Substances used as refrigerants into the
atmosphere while performing demolition or installation of air conditioning or
refrigeration equipment is prohibited.
C. If refrigerants are released into the atmosphere, the Contractor shall immediately report
to the Construction Facility Management Office (CFMO) the following;
1. Material released,
2. Estimate of amount released, and
3. Duration of release using the form provided in Appendix III.
D. All refrigerants that are recovered from old HVAC equipment and refrigerants added to
new HVAC equipment shall be documented in accordance with the MDTA HVAC SOP.
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS
207
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS
208
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 003129
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS
209
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 011000 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION (ALLOWANCE)
PART 1 GENERAL
A contingent allowance of Four-Hundred, Fifty-Thousand Dollars ($450,000.00) has been included
in the Schedule of Prices for miscellaneous work that may be determined necessary by the MDTA
during the construction period.
This work shall be performed only upon written direction of the Project Engineer. Upon the
directions from the Project Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a written time and material cost
for this task for the Project Engineers review and/or approval prior to commencing any work. The
Contractor shall allow two (2) weeks turnaround time for review and approval. In lieu of this
method, the Project Engineer may direct the Contractor to perform such work on a "Force Account"
basis, as provided by the General Provisions.
There is no guarantee that any or all of this item will be used during the term of this Contract. Payment
will be in conformance with the General Provisions.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 011010 BUILDING UPGRADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A. The intention of this Project is to replace old and failing mechanical equipment, as well
as to bring HVAC systems served by such equipment up to current Code. Refer to the
Project plans and specifications herein for additional requirements. The scope of work
includes, but is not limited to the following activities for the Administration and Police
Buildings:
Administration Building
Construction phasing, which shall include providing two double-wide temporary trailers for
relocation of building staff, as well as all temporary items needed to phase and stage the work
as shown on the plans and specified herein. A single-wide storage trailer shall be shared by
Administration and Police Building personnel. All trailer doors shall be provided with keycard
access and exterior video surveillance, monitored by the MDTA Police.
All demolition and new work shown on the plans and specified herein including, but not
limited to:
o
Demolition of existing ductwork, piping, oil-fired boiler, oil-fired water heater,
expansion tank, air separator, pumps, fans, packaged direct-expansion (DX)
rooftop units, water-cooled computer room air-conditioning units, entire pneumatic
and DDC control system, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, baseboard heaters, air
terminal units, and air devices.
o
Demolition of electrical components, lights, and associated electrical work related
to the demolition of HVAC equipment.
o
Demolition of ceilings.
o
Providing new roof mounted variable air volume air handling units and associated
ductwork.
o
Providing a new oil-fired boiler.
o
Providing a new oil-fired domestic water heater.
o
Providing new heating water distribution pumps.
o
Providing a new domestic hot water recirculation pump.
o
Providing a new duplex fuel-oil transfer pump system.
o
Providing new exhaust fans and heaters.
BUILDING UPGRADES
211
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
o
o
o
o
o
o
Police Building
Construction phasing, which shall include providing one double-wide temporary trailers for
relocation of 2nd Floor staff, a triple-wide trailer for relocation of 1st Floor police officers and
prisoner detention, as well as all temporary items needed to phase and stage the work as
shown on the plans and specified herein. A single-wide storage trailer shall be shared by
Administration and Police Building personnel. All trailer doors shall be provided with keycard
access and exterior video surveillance, monitored by the MDTA Police.
All demolition and new work shown on the plans and specified herein including, but not
limited to:
o
Demolition of existing ductwork, piping, propane-fired boiler, propane-fired water
heater, expansion tanks, air separator, pumps, fans, DX split-systems with roofand grade-mounted condensing units, propane-fired H&V units, entire DDC
control system, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, baseboard heaters, air terminal
units, and air devices.
o
Demolition of electrical components, lights, and associated electrical work related
to the demolition of HVAC equipment.
o
Demolition of ceilings.
o
Relocation of an existing computer room air-conditioner condensing unit.
o
Providing new roof mounted variable air volume air handling units and associated
ductwork.
o
Providing a new propane-fired boiler.
o
Providing a new propane-fired domestic water heater.
o
Providing new heating water distribution pumps.
o
Providing a new domestic hot water recirculation pump.
o
Providing new exhaust fans.
o
Providing new unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters.
o
Providing new finned tube radiators.
o
Providing new variable air volume (VAV) terminal units.
o
Providing a new, complete HVAC controls system.
o
Upgrading the electrical system as required to power new HVAC systems.
o
Providing new LED light fixtures throughout the building.
o
Providing a new heating and ventilating (H&V) units, including energy recovery
where indicated.
BUILDING UPGRADES
212
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS
A. Provide all products in accordance with the requirements of the related Special Provision
Sections, and as shown on the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXECUTION
A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the related Special Provisions,
and as shown on the plans.
BUILDING UPGRADES
213
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. Payment for the various Building Upgrades described herein will be made on a lump
sum basis; therefore no measurement will be made.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 011010
BUILDING UPGRADES
214
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
1.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
2.
3.
4.
5.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
control performance of the Work.
6.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
7.
8.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
REFERENCES
215
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
9.
1.2
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of
Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of
the land on which Project is to be built.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect
as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced.
Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract
Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable
standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-0080
CFR
(866) 512-1800
(202) 512-1800
DOD
(215) 697-6257
REFERENCES
216
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DSCC
Federal Specification
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
(215) 697-6257
(202) 619-8925
(202) 289-7800
FTMS
IBC
MIL
(See MILSPEC)
(888) 422-7233
(703) 931-4533
(215) 697-6257
UFAS
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-0080
1.3
REFERENCES
217
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
(703) 358-2960
AAADM
(216) 241-7333
AABC
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
(847) 303-5664
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
ABAA
(866) 956-5888
ACI
ACI International
(American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
(972) 506-7216
AF&PA
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGC
(703) 548-3118
REFERENCES
218
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AHA
AHAM
(202) 872-5955
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
(202) 452-7100
AITC
(303) 792-9559
ALCA
ALSC
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
(202) 293-8020
APA
(253) 565-6600
APA
(239) 454-6989
API
(202) 682-8000
REFERENCES
219
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ARI
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
(202) 207-0917
ASCE
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
(800) 527-4723
(404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(973) 882-1170
ASSE
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International)
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
(800) 449-8811
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
(334) 874-9800
AWS
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
REFERENCES
220
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
BHMA
(212) 297-2122
BIA
(703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI
www.bicsi.org
(800) 242-7405
(813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC
(866) 342-4772
CDA
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CEA
(613) 230-9263
CFFA
(216) 241-7333
CGA
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
(301) 596-2583
CPA
(301) 670-0604
REFERENCES
221
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CPPA
(800) 510-2772
(202) 462-9607
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
(847) 517-1200
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(866) 797-4272
CSI
(770) 972-3011
CSI
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
(604) 820-7700
CTI
(281) 583-4087
DHI
(703) 222-2010
EIA
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
EJCDC
(703) 295-5000
EJMA
(914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association
www.esda.org
(315) 339-6937
CRI
CRSI
CSA
REFERENCES
222
(416) 747-4000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FMG
FM Global
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
FMRC
FRSA
(401) 275-3000
(407) 671-3772
FSA
(610) 971-4850
FSC
49 228 367 66 0
GA
Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org
(202) 289-5440
GANA
(785) 271-0208
GRI
(Now GSI)
GS
Green Seal
www.greenseal.org
(202) 872-6400
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
(610) 522-8440
HI
Hydraulic Institute
www.pumps.org
(888) 786-7744
(973) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
(908) 464-8200
(703) 435-2900
HMMA
HPVA
REFERENCES
223
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HPW
IAS
ICEA
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
(847) 827-0830
IEC
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
(212) 419-7900
IESNA
(212) 248-5000
IEST
(847) 255-1561
IGCC
(315) 646-2234
IGMA
(613) 233-1510
ILI
(812) 275-4426
ISO
41 22 749 01 11
(202) 293-8020
(877) 464-7732
(702) 567-8150
ISSFA
(410) 838-6550
REFERENCES
224
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITS
Intertek
www.intertek.com
(800) 345-3851
(713) 407-3500
ITU
41 22 730 51 11
KCMA
(703) 264-1690
LMA
LPI
(800) 488-6864
(804) 314-8955
MBMA
(216) 241-7333
MFMA
(847) 480-9138
MFMA
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
(440) 250-9222
MPI
(888) 674-8937
MSS
(703) 281-6613
(312) 332-0405
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
(800) 797-6623
(281) 228-6200
NADCA
(202) 737-2926
NAIMA
(703) 684-0084
NBGQA
(800) 557-2848
NCMA
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
(262) 248-9094
NCTA
(202) 775-3550
NEBB
(301) 977-3698
NECA
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
(703) 841-3200
NETA
(888) 300-6382
(303) 697-8441
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
(301) 589-1776
REFERENCES
226
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
NGA
(866) 342-5642
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
(604) 524-2393
NRCA
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NTMA
(800) 323-9736
(540) 751-0930
NTRMA
(800) 966-5253
(210) 635-8100
PCI
(312) 786-0300
PDI
(800) 589-8956
(978) 557-0720
PGI
(217) 333-3929
REFERENCES
227
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
(800) 395-2522
(703) 736-9666
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
www.post-tensioning.org
(602) 870-7540
RCSC
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
RFCI
(301) 340-8580
RIS
(888) 225-7339
(415) 382-0662
RTI
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(877) 606-7323
(724) 776-4841
SDI
(847) 458-4647
SDI
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
(516) 294-5424
SGCC
(315) 646-2234
SIA
(703) 683-2075
SIGMA
SJI
(843) 626-1995
REFERENCES
228
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SMA
(561) 533-0991
SMACN
A
(703) 803-2980
National Association
www.smacna.org
SMPTE
(914) 761-1100
SPFA
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
(850) 434-2611
SPRI
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSPC
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
(847) 438-8265
SWI
(216) 241-7333
SWRI
(816) 472-7974
TCA
(864) 646-8453
(703) 907-7700
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TMS
(303) 939-9700
TPI
(703) 683-1010
TPI
(847) 649-5555
TRI
(312) 670-4177
UL
(877) 854-3577
(847) 272-8800
UNI
(972) 243-3902
USGBC
(202) 828-7422
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
(800) 283-1486
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
WCSC
(800) 506-4636
(212) 297-2109
WDMA
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
WI
REFERENCES
230
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
WIC
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WSRCA
(800) 725-0333
(650) 570-5441
WWPA
(503) 224-3930
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
ICBO
ES
ICC
(888) 422-7233
(703) 931-4533
ICC-ES
(800) 423-6587
(562) 699-0543
SBCCI
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CE
Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-7923
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.commerce.gov
(202) 482-2000
DOD
Department of Defense
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
(215) 697-6257
DOE
Department of Energy
www.energy.gov
(202) 586-9220
EPA
(202) 272-0167
FAA
(866) 835-5322
FCC
(888) 225-5322
FDA
(888) 463-6332
GSA
(800) 488-3111
HUD
(202) 708-1112
LBL
(510) 486-4000
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
PBS
REFERENCES
232
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PHS
(202) 690-7694
RUS
(202) 720-9540
SD
State Department
www.state.gov
(202) 647-4000
TRB
(202) 334-2934
(202) 720-2791
USPS
(202) 268-2000
Postal Service
www.usps.com
REFERENCES
233
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
B. The Maryland Department of the Environments 2011 Maryland Standards and
Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control applies to this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials will be as shown in the details provided on the Plans for Super Silt Fence and
Stabilized Construction Entrance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where noted on the Plans. Relocate and modify facilities as required by
progress of the Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Special Provision Section
011010 "Building Upgrades."
2. Site disturbance is limited to the areas indicated with the Limit of Disturbance
(LOD).
3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary paved areas as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
234
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
5. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent
flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
F. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Special Provision
Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
G. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the
drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations.
Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste
and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility.
Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for
integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape
development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
236
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other
petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant
materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at
temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Restore the area
of the temporary trailers and parking in accordance with the notes on the Plans.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 015000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and
patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching individual parts of the Work.
2. Special Provision Section 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for
patching fire-rated construction.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results
in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
include but are not limited to the following:
1. Primary operational systems and equipment.
2. Air or smoke barriers.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
5. Control systems.
6. Communication systems.
7. Electrical wiring systems.
8. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
9. Membranes and flashings.
10. Equipment supports.
11. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
12. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on
the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Engineer's opinion, reduce
the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
D. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties
involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review
areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as
not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching
are to be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of
substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems:
Where existing
services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements
retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original
Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to
be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate
evidence of patching and refinishing.
D. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
1. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
a. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1)
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.4
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 017329
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for
preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and
finishes systems and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals
for operation and maintenance manuals.
2.
3.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 3 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before
requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and
maintenance directory. Engineer will return two copies of draft and mark whether
general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before
final inspection. Engineer will return copy with comments within 15 days after final
inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit 3
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations
by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate
information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to
operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system.
For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance
manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation
used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according
to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation
for Building Systems."
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
244
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
5. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to
Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
6. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
7. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
8. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations
in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of
contents, and drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and
component:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
246
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
247
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
248
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
249
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.
For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation:
Manufacturers' maintenance
documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of
equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail
essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
250
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list
of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record:
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation
and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating
procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for
types of emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating
care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and
maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and
piece of equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare
information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
251
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 017823
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for
instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training videotapes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit six (6) copies of outline of instructional program for
demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning
objective and outline for each training module.
1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
2. Qualification Data: For instructor.
3. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length
of instruction time.
4. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
5. Demonstration and Training DVD Videos: Submit two copies within seven days of
end of each training module.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training
modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual
Specification Sections, and as follows:
1. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment or air distribution systems and
terminal equipment and devices, boilers, pumps, and chemical treatment systems.
2. HVAC instrumentation and controls.
3. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers panelboards and motor
controls.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the
following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project Record Documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
257
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2. Requirements for testing of soils for possible contamination and procedures for
removal and disposal, and replacement with new select backfill.
3. Restoration and repair of site.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision 011010 "Building Upgrades."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently
removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or
removed and reinstalled.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Restoration and Repair: Existing items that are demolished as consequence of the
selective demolition. Items are to be repaired and restored to existing conditions or as
indicated on the plans and specified herein.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of
interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property
of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.5
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction and operations are to remain and require
protection.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For underground tank removal technician.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the
measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection,
and for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing site and
adjacent buildings.
D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior
to start of demolition.
E. Predemolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill
facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition
area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Engineer and Owner of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings
before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may be present in soils to be selectively
demolished.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified in Part 2.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous
materials except under procedures specified in Part 2.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation
verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit
documentation at Project closeout.
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting, selective
demolition operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.
D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings
and preconstruction photographs.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage
operations.
2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing site elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition
of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water
leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Provide adequate dewatering for selective demolition area to sufficiently remove
existing ground water and storm runoff that may enter the excavation zone.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Protect site elements that are to remain or that are exposed during selective
demolition operations.
5. Cover and protect equipment that has not been removed.
6. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures and dust control.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective
demolition.
2. Comply with requirements and guidelines for excavation shoring.
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
3.7
CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 024119
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending,
and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
269
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength
Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing
agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing
Technician, Grade II.
1.7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
270
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg. F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg. F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent
of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
271
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain
admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M.
2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace
slag cement.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures
and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
272
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlappolyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B, dissipating.
2.6
RELATED MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of
grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
2.7
REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can
be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
273
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
274
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.9
2.10
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.11
CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
275
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg. F, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg. F, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of reinforcement and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 30.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
276
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI
301.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
3.4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
277
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface
is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
3.5
3.6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
278
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not
less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period,
using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3.7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
279
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out
low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete
and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as
original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to
blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,
dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least
72 hours.
D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's
approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
280
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
281
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratorycured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or
rejection of concrete.
10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive
strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing
and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by
Engineer.
11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not
comply with the Contract Documents.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
282
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
283
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 048100 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Special Provision Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail
slots for masonry anchors.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at
28 days.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together
with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch
numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used.
Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
B. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations
are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes.
ingredients.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
F. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit
type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
indicated.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,
from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each
cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use
with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof
dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation
of dirt and oil.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry
when construction is not in progress.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
2.3
CONCRETE LINTELS
A. General: Provide one of the following:
1. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated.
2. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with
requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars
indicated.
2.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type
with single pair of side rods.
2.6
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
being cleaned.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
2.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide
the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for
other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that
will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of
grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C
143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using
units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After
installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent
to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing
masonry.
3.3
TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch
or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than
1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10
feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by
more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed
joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where openings of more than 12 inches for bricksize units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.7
D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C
780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
3.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable
to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
F. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
G. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
3.9
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Roof deck.
2. Noncomposite form deck.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete for normal weight structural
concrete fill over metal deck.
2. Special Provision 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with
miscellaneous steel shapes.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
STEEL DECKING
298
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3,
"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its
"Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm
ratings.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel-deck
according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
2.2
METAL DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
STEEL DECKING
299
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI
Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.
E. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same
material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
STEEL DECKING
300
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and
commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3
ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated.
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal.
STEEL DECKING
301
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two
welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 18 inches apart, maximum.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches,
and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws
or fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 11/2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4
FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an
average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches,
and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws
or fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 11/2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped.
STEEL DECKING
302
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to
deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends
of ribs and sides of deck.
3.5
3.6
PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces
of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel-deck is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
STEEL DECKING
303
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
STEEL DECKING
304
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
3. Miscellaneous steel framing.
4. Loose steel lintels.
B. Related Special Provision Sections:
1. Special Provision Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing items cast
into concrete.
2. Special Provision Section 048100 "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose
lintels, and other items built into unit masonry.
1.3
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply
with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other
work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS
305
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
3. Miscellaneous steel framing.
4. Loose steel lintels.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
D. Field Quality-Control reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7
personnel
according
to
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
METAL FABRICATIONS
306
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Channels and Angles: ASTM A 36.
C. Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A 992.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500
F. Slotted Chanel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch
minimum nominal thickness.
2.2
FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
307
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Alloy
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Special Provision 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting."
B. Bituminous
Paint:
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
Cold-applied
asphalt
emulsion
complying
with
C. Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive Primer: Complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips
METAL FABRICATIONS
308
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
2.5
2.6
2.7
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
METAL FABRICATIONS
309
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.8
STEEL FINISHES
A. Shop prime steel items, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Exterior items, including lintels, to be primed with alkyd, anti-corrosive primer.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interior Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
D. All exposed surfaces shall be field painted after installation.
1. Do not paint steel plates with abrasive finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured
from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
METAL FABRICATIONS
310
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
3.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
311
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
312
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.3
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts and anchor
bolts. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section
"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building
construction.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
2. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade,
and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types
of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group
1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
2.6
FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than
that required to support structural loads.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this
is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
J. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:
1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
K. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout
entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
N. Provide anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work.
Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. Toe Boards: Provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided
floors, roofs and platforms.
2.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished
after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in
12 feet.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place
construction.
3.2
3.3
PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings
at time of Substantial Completion.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
2. Wood furring.
3. Utility shelving.
4. Plywood backing panels.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches
nominal in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
321
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product, indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified
independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include
physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according
to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design
values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered
wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
322
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not
in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be
treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing
no arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or
otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated..
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
323
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and
AWPA C27 (plywood).
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in
spaces, where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment
of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
324
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber
to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6
2.7
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressurepreservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hotdip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
325
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a
sill sealer; 1-inchnominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos
as its active ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for
accurate fit. Locate, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements
for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. Provide
blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels.
Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of
joints or optimum joint arrangement.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
326
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservativetreated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
H. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
I. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members,
with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable
2. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2
3.3
PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
327
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to
comply with EPA-registered label.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
328
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Sheet metal curb caps.
3. Preformed flashings.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood
cants, and wood nailers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show
layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations
and roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Special Provision Section.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
329
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with
type of roofing indicated.
1.5
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by
field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and
base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof,
weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt
roof drainage routes.
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
ROOF ACCESSORIES
330
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2
METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating
designation and mill phosphatized for field painting.
B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated.
C. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip
process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
coated.
3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer):
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer
color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin
by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance
requirements in AAMA 2605, except as modified below:
1)
Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.
2)
Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
331
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
type of use and mill finish.
1. Factory-Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, provide
pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer
coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
2. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x
(Chemical Finish:
Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish:
Conversion coating; Organic Coating:
Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Color and Gloss As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.
F. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304
or Type 316, No. 2D finish.
G. Steel Shapes:
ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip
ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.
galvanized
to
comply
with
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, 1 inch thick.
B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, 1 inch thick.
D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
332
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs:
Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction
indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner
joints, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter
bottom.
1. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
b. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
c. Pate Company (The).
d. Thybar Corporation.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
333
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual
locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, and clean, sloped for drainage, and
securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
334
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for
completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to
weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
1. Install cupolas in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact
with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment
and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof
accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,
jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool mark
3.3
TOUCH UP
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in
accordance with painting Special Provision Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
335
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
336
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 078413 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and
inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications
include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's
products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration
firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in
itself confer qualification on buyer.
1. Contractor must be a certified installer by manufacturer/supplier of approved
firestop system(s). The Contractor shall provide documentation meeting these
requirements at time of bid as part of the Experience Questionnaire.
2. Documentation/letter from manufacturer/supplier identifying company as a
certified installer must be submitted for the record prior to installation.
3. Copy of employee(s) training records from approved manufacturer/supplier must
be submitted for the record prior to installation.
4. Only trained employees shall install the approved firestop system(s).
5. Technical representative from the manufacturer/supplier must come to the site
when work begins to verify manufacturer installation procedures are being
adhered to.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the
following requirements:
1. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced
in "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to
designations listed by the following:
1)
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or
other causes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.6
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate penetration firestopping.
C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration
firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of
installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2. Grace Construction Products.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Nelson Firestop Products.
6. RectorSeal Corporation.
7. Specified Technologies Inc.
8. 3M Fire Protection Products.
9. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
10. USG Corporation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates
forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive
pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier
walls, and fire partitions.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. Horizontal assemblies include floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers:
determined per UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg.
at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage
when tested according to UL 1479.
F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following
limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those
components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3
FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place
concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent
strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to
concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after
cure during exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined
with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration
firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of
materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds,
mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration
firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the
following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove
loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of
bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications
indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce crosssectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components
of firestopping.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels
will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use
mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb.
Building Management of Any Damage."
Notify
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes joint sealants for following applications,
including those specified by reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints between metal panels.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows
and louvers.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows and elevator entrances.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
349
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of
cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to
view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint
sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated
by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction
testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS
350
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or
licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the
Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program
for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for
adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation
hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by
referencing standard specifications and test methods.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
JOINT SEALANTS
351
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacture or are below 40 deg. F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and
other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of
elastomeric joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression
caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
JOINT SEALANTS
352
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside
the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
4. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
5. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect to coordinate with
adjacent surfaces from manufacturer's full range.
2.3
JOINT SEALANTS
353
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
JOINT SEALANTS
354
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants
and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
JOINT SEALANTS
355
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include
the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's
written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS
356
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
JOINT SEALANTS
357
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5
PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
JOINT SEALANTS
358
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
JOINT SEALANTS
359
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Special Provision Sections:
1. Special Provision 087111"Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door
hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Special Provision 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors
and frames.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work:
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
1.6
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements
before fabrication.
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering product that may be incorporated into the work include, but at not limited to,
the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft.
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
to
ANSI/SDI A250.6
with
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch thick.
2.6
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2. Jamb Anchors: Provide four anchors per jamb.
3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. Drill stop in head
jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from
either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Special Provision 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted door hardware.
3. Comply with
applicable requirements
in
ANSI/SDI A250.6
and
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for
hardware.
2.7
STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by
primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied
coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
c. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum
3/4 inch.
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Remove bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive
primer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 081113
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATION)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and
approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is
available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner about door hardware and keying.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in
providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently
certified by DHI as follows:
1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
1.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.6
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on
hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.
1. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
b. Hager Companies.
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
B. Antifriction-Bearing Hinges:
1. Mounting: Full mortise (butts).
2. Bearing Material: Manufacturer's standard antifriction bearing.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
A. Door Frame Silencers (Mutes): No. SR64 by Ives.
B. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.
2.5
FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware
schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and
frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the
following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing
regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces
that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not
fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or
one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless
other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are
provided.
E. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door
to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements.
3.2
3.3
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 087111
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by
louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements
specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those
provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles,
angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color
finish.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements
before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly.
B. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 700-fpm
free-area intake velocity.
d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 900-fpm
free-area intake velocity.
5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.4
LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish:
thicker.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with
adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items
that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide
new units.
E. Protect nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or
dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of
bituminous paint.
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 089000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
B. Alterations of Existing Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Work of this Section
pertains to new construction as well alterations to the existing wall and ceiling work
relative to the following:
1. Cutting and Patching, as specified in Special Provision Section 017300
"Execution".
2. Preparation of new openings in existing walls and ceilings.
3. Tie-in of new and existing construction.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing
panels in gypsum board assemblies and for Sound-attenuating Blankets.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from
ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed
steel studs and runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings: 25 gauge - 0.018
inch (0.45 mm) and 20 gauge - 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), 6 inches (152 mm),
2-1/2 inches (64 mm) and 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for
attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor or Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load
capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the
design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch
(4.12 mm) in diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness
of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) and 1-1/2 inches (38
mm).
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings: 0.018 inch (0.45
mm) and 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), 2-1/2 inches (64
mm) and 3-5/8 inches (92 mm).
3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit
steel stud size.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,
heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel
framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Special Provision Section 072100 "Thermal
Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24
inches (610 mm) o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to
wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short
flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short
flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space
second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation
to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacing that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers
to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring
members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive
finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 092216
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
4. Texture finishes.
B. Alterations of Existing Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Work of this Section
pertains to new construction as well alterations to the existing wall and ceiling work
relative to the following:
1. Cutting and Patching, as specified in Special Provision 017300 "Execution".
2. Preparation of new openings in existing walls and ceilings.
3. Tie-in of new and existing construction.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel
framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each
trim accessory indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
392
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings,
on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum
board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
GYPSUM BOARD
393
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
2.3
GYPSUM BOARD
394
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Standard Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes: Provide the following products by the same manufacturer as the gypsum
board panels.
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Standard Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes: Provide the following products by the same manufacturer as the gypsum
board panels.
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
C. Architectural Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions
indicated, with flanges designed to receive joint treatment.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products scheduled below or comparable products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Gordon Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD
396
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
4. Provide manufacturers standard pre-fabricated L, T and cross-intersection pieces
of the same characteristics as the trim profiles being joined.
a. Field-cutting and mitering of trim intersections will be acceptable at
contractors option, subject to Mock-up approval by the Architect.
5. Wall Reveals and Trim:
a. Intermediate Reveals: Pittcon SWR Series.
b. Perimeter Reveals, open-ended: Pittcon STR Series.
c. Perimeter Reveals, U-shaped: Pittcon SWR-U Series.
d. Straight Edge Trim, L-shaped: Pittcon ST Series.
e. Curved Edge Trim, L-shaped: Pittcon STF Series.
f. Straight Edge Trim, 45 degree bevel: Pittcon ST Series.
g. 90 degree Corner with reveals, both faces: Pittcon SO-ER-90 Series.
h. 90 degree Corner with single step: Pittcon SCS-2X Series.
i. 45 degree Corner: Pittcon SO-45 Series.
j. 60 degree Corner: Pittcon SO-60 Series.
6. Ceiling Reveals and Trim:
a. Intermediate Reveals: Pittcon SWR Series.
b. Perimeter Reveals, Wall to Gypsum Board Ceiling: Pittcon SCR Series.
c. Perimeter Reveals, Wall to Acoustical Panel Ceiling: Pittcon SWR-C Series.
d. Perimeter Reveals, Drywall-to-Acoustical: Pittcon SWR-DA Series.
e. Straight Edge Trim, L-shaped: Pittcon ST Series.
GYPSUM BOARD
397
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
GYPSUM BOARD
398
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly
adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers
manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
GYPSUM BOARD
399
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support
framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
GYPSUM BOARD
400
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7
sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations
and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating
edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
1. Interior Stud Cavity Friction fit securely between studs. Butt ends of blankets
closely together and fill all voids.
2. Creased blankets Bow the blankets slightly to fit into stud cavity. Slit the
blankets vertically 1 deep with a utility knife.
GYPSUM BOARD
401
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
GYPSUM BOARD
402
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.5
GYPSUM BOARD
403
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Standard Interior and Exterior Trim: Install in all locations recommended and
required by the gypsum panel manufacturer, except where Architectural Aluminum
Trim is indicated, including but not limited to the following:
1. Outside corners of gypsum board walls, column closures, duct and pipe chases
and ceiling bulkheads.
2. Perimeter of wall and ceiling openings and recesses not covered by door and/or
window frames or applied frame trim, excluding penetrations for mechanical,
plumbing and electrical work
3. Perimeter joints of gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces aligned or intersecting
with non-gypsum board walls and ceilings.
D. Architectural Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings including
types of locations listed for the Standard Trim where special design detailing is
required.
3.6
GYPSUM BOARD
404
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.7
PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors
and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
GYPSUM BOARD
405
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
GYPSUM BOARD
406
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems
for ceilings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision Section 092900 Gypsum Board for gypsum board ceilings
and bulkheads.
C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and
other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color,
pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
G. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing
pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's
full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
H. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide
acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that
inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and
showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.6
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and
seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested firerated design.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated
ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and
the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive
anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of
hanger wires.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.5
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,
and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling
components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 095113
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on the following interior substrates:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
2. Steel.
3. Gypsum board.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
INTERIOR PAINTING
419
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
application instructions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss
of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg. F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg. F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
420
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Behr Process Corporation.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. Duron, Inc.
4. ICI Paints.
5. M.A.B. Paints.
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: Match existing colors for adjacent, similar materials.
D. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
2.3
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
INTERIOR PAINTING
421
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.
B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.
C. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52.
D. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43.
E. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.
F. Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60
degrees): MPI #114.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:
moisture meter as follows:
1. Masonry: 12 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
INTERIOR PAINTING
422
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt,
oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
3.3
APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's
recommendations in "MPI Manual."
written
instructions
and
to
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
INTERIOR PAINTING
423
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut
in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4
3.5
INTERIOR PAINTING
424
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
425
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
Thermowells.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Gage attachments.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.
2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee
fitting.
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw
threads.
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b. Ashcroft Inc.
c. Ernst Flow Industries.
d. Flo Fab Inc.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Miljoco Corporation.
g. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
h. Trerice, H. O. Co.
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
j. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
k. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm)
nominal diameter.
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5. Pressure Connection:
Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is
indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in
psi (kPa).
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
9. Window: Glass.
10. Ring: Brass.
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.4
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device.
Include extension for use on insulated piping.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in
piping tees.
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors.
bushings if required to match sizes.
Include
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages shall be the following:
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
3.5
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions
and design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
j. Port: Full.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.
2.5
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
435
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
3.3
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where
solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except
where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3.4
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 220523
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Fastener systems.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment
shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according
to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with
100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig
minimum compressive strength.
C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.3
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.4
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,
nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
J. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
3.2
METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.4
PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
O. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTAL
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
B.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus
the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment
schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
B.
C.
D.
Maximum Temperature:
deg. C).
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
H.
Adhesive:
substrate.
I.
Label Content:
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency
notification instructions.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
PIPE LABELS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations
or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
2. Sanitary Waste Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Tapes.
9. Securements.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision 230700 "HVAC Insulation."
PLUMBING INSULATION
452
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and
access panels.
5. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
6. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
7. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance
of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department
of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have firetest-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
PLUMBING INSULATION
453
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
1.5
1.6
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Special Provision 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required
for maintenance.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments
that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials
shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
PLUMBING INSULATION
454
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3
ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
PLUMBING INSULATION
455
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;
comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PLUMBING INSULATION
456
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5
SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
PLUMBING INSULATION
457
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket:
Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
PLUMBING INSULATION
458
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. PVC Jacket:
High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or
field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints,
and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications:
3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
PLUMBING INSULATION
459
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Tee covers.
Flange and union covers.
End caps.
Beveled collars.
Valve covers.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are
not available.
TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
PLUMBING INSULATION
460
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.9
SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
PLUMBING INSULATION
462
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
PLUMBING INSULATION
463
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4
PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
3.5
PLUMBING INSULATION
465
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,
hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation
of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. But each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie
wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket
flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below
ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with
a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather
mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing
mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges,
and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining
insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on
insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by
PLUMBING INSULATION
466
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with
finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform
to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of
same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover
in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible
with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches16
of 20 over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between
flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover
assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry,
apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6
PLUMBING INSULATION
467
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PLUMBING INSULATION
468
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PLUMBING INSULATION
469
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PLUMBING INSULATION
470
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
471
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the
building.
2. Specialty valves.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall
withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following products:
1. Specialty valves.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
C. Field quality-control reports.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe
sizes.
2.2
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements for general-duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum
breakers.
2.5
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.
2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping
system fitting.
C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
d. JCM Industries.
e. Romac Industries, Inc.
f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.
g. Viking Johnson.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
C. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements in Special Provision 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
pressure-reducing valves.
D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain
and plumb.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment,
machine, and specialty.
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join
copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
3.3
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply
to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping
NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are
specified in Special Provision 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components for identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.7
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested
and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8
ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate
flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return
piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping
during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified
for application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
3.9
CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge piping before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either
AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50
ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint
fittings; and soldered joints.
3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used.
indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use gate
valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
globe valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from
equipment.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following domestic water piping
specialties:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Water pressure-reducing valves.
3. Strainers.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1013.
3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and
systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of
contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with
air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at
least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap
device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not
acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing
valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
3.3
3.4
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 221119
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Special Provision 110513
"Common Motor Requirements for Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.3
CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft
horizontal.
D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of
size required to support pump weight.
1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Special Provision
220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Special Provision 221116
"Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings,
and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal
to or greater than size of pump nozzles.
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of
the following pumps:
a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 231126 - FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. LPG: Liquefied-petroleum gas.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:
a. Piping and Valves: 125 psig (862 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
2. For Piping Containing Liquid:
a. Piping between Shutoff Valves: 350 psig (2413 kPa) unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Piping Other Than Above: 250 psig (1723 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
c. Valves and Fittings: 250 psig (1723 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
B. LPG System Pressure within Buildings: One pressure range. 5 psig (34.5 kPa) or
less.
C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data
of selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Dielectric fittings.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for
multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the
same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and
expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly
and pressure regulator assembly.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the
items involved.
D. Installation Documentation: Submit the following installation documentation:
1. Propane system mechanical and electrical plans in AutoCad format.
2. Electrical installation details.
3. Mechanical installation details.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and coordinated
with other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Operation and Maintenance
Manuals shall include the following as a minimum:
1. System description information sheet
2. Description of system operation
3. Packaged system dimension and general arrangement drawing
1.6
4.
5.
Bill of materials
6.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according
to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed
behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Special Provision
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.9
WARRANTY
A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of 12 months from the date of
shipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Metallic Pipe and Fittings Threads: Comply with Standard for Pipe Threads,
General Purpose, ANSI/ASME B1.20.1
a. Pipe Threads: Comply with National Fuel Gas Code Table I Specifications
for Threading Metallic Pipe for length of threaded portion of pipe and
number of threads to be cut.
B. Above Grade Piping and Fittings:
1. Welded Pipe: ASTM A106 / A53 Grade B, Sch. 40, Seamless / ERW black steel
pipe, beveled ends.
2. Threaded Pipe: ASTM A106 / A53 Grade B, Sch. 80, Seamless / ERW black
steel pipe.
3. Fittings Larger than 2: ASTM A-234 standard weight, seamless carbon steel,
long radius, black welding fittings.
4. Fittings Sizes 2 and Smaller: ANSI B16.11 standard weight, forged steel, socket
welding fittings.
5. Flanges: ASTM A105 ANSI Class 300, standard bore, weld neck, carbon steel
flanges. Use ASTM grade 193 Grade B7 flange bolts and ASTM A194 Grade 2H
flange bolt nuts. Note: Discharge flange of propane-air blender is ANSI Class
150.
6. Screwed Fittings: ASTM A105, 2000# or 3000# carbon steel.
7. Thread Compound: Gasoila High Fill Thread Sealant (JC-30) with Teflon (no
equal)
8. Gaskets: API 601 spiral wound with non-asbestos, high temperature and pressure
filler. (1,500 degree F minimum).
9. Flexible Connectors: Use only where indicated. Designed for minimum working
pressure of 350 psig with a 5 to 1 safety factor. Mark all connector assemblies
with manufacturers name or trademark and indicate for use with LP Gas.
10. Tubing and Tube fittings: 304 Stainless steel tubing (wall thickness as follows 1
0.083, 1/2 0.065, 3/8 and 1/4 0.049), Swagelok stainless steel fittings (no
equal).
C. Material Fabrication, Testing: Perform all field installed pipe testing in accordance
with ANSI / ASME B31.3, pressure piping code.
FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS
497
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Piping Joints:
1. Approved for LPG service.
2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket.
3. Minimum working pressure of 250 psig (1723 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C)
operating temperature.
4. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be
capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.
5. Maximum 36-inch (914-mm) length for liquid LPG lines.
B. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 21/2 and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket
with 50 percent free area.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Plug: Bronze.
4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).
7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
F. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with LPG.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" Articles.
7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
8. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
2.5
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions (by Installer): Examine conditions under which piping
systems are to be installed and notify Prime Contractor in writing of any conditions
detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off LPG to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 and the International Fuel
Gas Code to determine that LPG utilization devices are turned off in piping section
affected.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Comply with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements
for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment
traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment
for roughing-in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect,
including service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning
and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3
inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below
bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below
grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed LPG
piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of
steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from
containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: LPG piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be
installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls
from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS
506
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install LPG piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
b. Do not install LPG piping in solid walls or partitions.
Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with
level side down.
R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection
to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
T. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.
U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically
operated valve.
V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure
gages are specified in Division 23 Special Provision Section "Meters and Gages for
HVAC Piping."
W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Special Provision Section
"Common Work Results for HVAC Piping."
X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Special Provision Section
"Common Work Results for HVAC Piping."
Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Special Provision Section
"Common Work Results for HVAC Piping."
3.5
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainlesssteel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space
adequate for servicing and testing.
3.6
3.7
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16 mm).
3.8
CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install
valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union
between valve and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close
as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9
3.10 PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and
exterior LPG piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, and piping
specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS
509
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought steel fittings and threaded
joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
3.15 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground Liquid Piping:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Commercial, gas- and oil-fired, domestic-water heaters.
2. Domestic-water heater accessories.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include
rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
C. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas- and oil-fired, domesticwater heater, from manufacturer.
B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water
heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C. ASME Compliance:
1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,
domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,
finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV.
D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact
with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System
Components - Health Effects."
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-andpressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving
capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than
domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
E. Fuel Burner:
1. Standards: Combination gas-and-oil burner assembly, complying with appropriate
requirements of UL 795; or comply with UL 296 for oil burners for No. 2 fuel oil
and UL 795 for natural-gas fuel.
2. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
3. Vent Connection: According to standards of authorities having jurisdiction for
dual-fuel, domestic-water heaters.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into
open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water
piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with
requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Special Provision 221119
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters.
G. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domesticwater heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow
through each domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each
domestic-water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water
heater outlet.
H. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater
storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
I. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.
J. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Special
Provision 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
B. Comply with requirements for fuel-oil piping specified in Special Provision 231113
"Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space
for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of
domestic-water heaters.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified
in Special Provision 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas- and oil-fired, domesticwater heaters.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 223400
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230130.51 - HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts,
plenums, and system components.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. ASCS: Air systems cleaning specialist.
B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For an ASCS.
B. Strategies and procedures plan.
C. Cleanliness verification report.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA.
1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA on a full-time basis.
2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified as an ASCS by NADCA.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-glass ducts.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components
to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of
the Work.
B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR
2006.
C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a
minimum, include the following:
1. Supervisor contact information.
2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.
3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.
4. Required support from other trades.
5. Equipment and material storage requirements.
6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.
B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of
the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in
HVAC Systems" Section.
3.3
CLEANING
A. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.
B. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.
C. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:
1. Air devices for supply and return air.
2. Air-terminal units.
3. Ductwork:
a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes and reheat coils, to the air-handling
unit.
b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.
c. Exhaust-air ducts.
D. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside
the HVAC system during the cleaning process.
E. Particulate Collection:
1. For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris
removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other
points of entry into the building.
2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3
micrometer or larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is
exhausting inside the building,
F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.
G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices
inside the system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on
completion of cleaning.
H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly
clean. On completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded
just prior to cleaning operations.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION
A. Verify cleanliness according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Verification of HVAC System
Cleanliness" Section.
B. Verify HVAC system cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before applying any
treatment or introducing any treatment-related substance to the HVAC system,
including biocidal agents and coatings.
C. Perform visual inspection for cleanliness. If no contaminants are evident through
visual inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean. If visible
contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system
where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for
cleanliness.
D. Additional Verification:
1. Perform surface comparison testing or NADCA vacuum test.
2. Conduct NADCA vacuum gravimetric test analysis for nonporous surfaces.
E. Verification of Coil Cleaning:
1. Coil will be considered clean if the coil is free of foreign matter and chemical
residue, based on a thorough visual inspection.
F. Prepare a written cleanliness verification report.
following:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.5
RESTORATION
A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and
components according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Restoration and Repair of
Mechanical Systems" Section.
B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements in
Special Provision 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in
Project closeout report.
C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing.
Comply with requirements in Special Provision 233113 "Metal Ducts."
D. Replace damaged insulation according to Special Provision 230700 "HVAC
Insulation."
E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.
F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall
have removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
5.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Painting and finishing.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
piping system contents.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum
working pressure at 180 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
2.6
SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.7
ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID
to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type:
chrome-plated finish.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydrauliccement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Special Provision 017329 "Cutting and Patching" and Special Provision
024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and
procedures.
3.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chromeplated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or splitcasting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
537
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set
screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
rough-brass finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floorplate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas
or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is
specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings:
For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of
cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint. Refer to Special Provision 079200 "Joint Sealants" for materials
and installation.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
538
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Sections
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Special
Provision 099123 "Interior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7
CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger
in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Special Provision 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes general requirements for single-phase and
polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction
motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment
manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field
installation.
1.3
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible
with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300
feet above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for
motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.5
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for
radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230513
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
2. Filled-system thermometers.
3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
4. Thermowells.
5. Dial-type pressure gages.
6. Gage attachments.
7. Test plugs.
8. Test-plug kits.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Ashcroft Inc.
2. Marsh Bellofram.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Standard: ASME B40.200.
C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.
D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in
deg F.
E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.
F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.
H. Window: Plain glass.
I. Ring: Stainless steel.
J. Element: Bimetal coil.
K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ashcroft Inc.
b. Trerice, H. O. Co.
c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.
3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum; 5-inch nominal diameter.
4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and
connection to pointer.
6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated
in deg. F.
7. Pointer: Stainless steel, black finish.
8. Window: Glass.
9. Ring: Stainless steel.
10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360
degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass
stem and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.
b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
2.3
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal-Case, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.
2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee
fitting.
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR (Copper Nickel (90-10)).
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES (Copper Nickel (70-30)).
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.5
PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Ashcroft Inc.
b. Marsh Bellofram.
c. Trerice, H. O. Co.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
e. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe
threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated
in psi and kPa.
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
9. Window: Glass.
10. Ring: Brass.
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.6
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe
threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on
insulated piping.
B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.
C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1
pipe threads.
2.7
TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
2. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap.
Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
F. Core Inserts:
rubber.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical
position in piping tees.
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors.
bushings if required to match sizes.
Include
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.4
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.
2. Liquid-in-glass type.
B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units shall
be one of the following:
1. Compact-style, liquid-in-glass type.
C. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be one of the
following:
1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.
2. Liquid-in-glass type.
3. Direct-mounted, vapor-actuated type.
D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each heating water coil shall be one of the
following:
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic self-sealing rubber inserts.
B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic self-sealing rubber inserts.
3.7
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230519
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Bronze ball valves.
2. Bronze swing check valves.
3. Iron swing check valves.
4. Bronze gate valves.
5. Iron gate valves.
6. Bronze globe valves.
B. Related Special Provision Sections:
1. HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
2. Special Provision 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
valve tags and schedules.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from
single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
1.6
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
2.4
2.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
B. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. NIBCO INC.
c. Powell Valves.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
2.6
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement
during shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting
for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its
material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and
damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal and vertical position.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
3.4
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230523
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following hangers and supports for
HVAC system piping and equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry
Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe
Hangers and Supports."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show
fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
2.4
2.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in
hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from
structural-steel shapes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel:
galvanized.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
B. Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,
nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
5. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,
from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8):
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17):
installations.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
6. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
7. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
8. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
9. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel beams.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that
are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields:
insulation.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting:
surface.
Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and
with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and
to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in painting
Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230529
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
5. Housed spring mounts.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Spring hangers.
8. Pipe riser resilient supports.
9. Resilient pipe guides.
10. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph.
2. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component
projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees
either side of normal.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation details indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment
weight and operation, wind forces required to select vibration isolators, wind
restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building
structure, and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser system
has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loads.
4. Wind-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of wind restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacing. Indicate association with vibration isolation
devices.
c. Coordinate vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items
and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and
factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically
sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled,
encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to
structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
582
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
equipment before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control
devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select
sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads within specified loading limits.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal
operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they
are out of contact during normal operation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230548
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and
doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
I. Label Content:
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency
notification instructions.
2.3
PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations
or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.4
DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg. F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive:
substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations
or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows:
Integral with duct system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.5
VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location
of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating),
and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar
special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.6
WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of
plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.5
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; faucets; convenience and lawnwatering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures
and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Heating-Water: 1-1/2 inches.
b. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches, round.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Heating-Water: Natural.
b. Refrigerant: Natural.
3. Letter Color:
a. Heating-Water: Black.
b. Refrigerant: Black.
3.6
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet
the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC
or NEBB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by
AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect and Construction Manager on approval of the
TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
C. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
As described in
COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and
to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems
and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
requirements
in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004,
Section 7.2.2,
"Air
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and
thickness as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply
with requirements in Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore
insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Special Provision
230700 "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve
position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with
paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the
fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from
duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are
measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps,
heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures.
Calculate actual system-effect factors.
Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode
to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitottube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue
to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
604
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate
static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record final fan-performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan
systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume
air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify
operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance
the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constantvolume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one
is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure
static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outdoor airflow.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
606
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan
systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of
terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so
they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow
controller set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit
to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts
and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.7
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressuredrop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
E. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve
flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as
follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
indicated flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,
rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air
temperature.
H. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of
balancing.
I. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following
tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans:
percent.
0 to plus 10
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed
by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
3. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents:
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop
Drawings and product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following
data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
612
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
613
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final air flow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg. F.
K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump
curves and include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model number and serial number.
f. Water flow rate in gpm.
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches.
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
617
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230593
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Tapes.
9. Securements.
10. Corner angles.
B. Related Special Provision Sections:
1. Special Provision 220700 "Plumbing Insulation."
2. Special Provision 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
HVAC INSULATION
621
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and
access panels.
5. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
6. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
7. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance
of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department
of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
HVAC INSULATION
622
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have firetest-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less.
1.5
1.6
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Special Provision 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for
equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation
and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments
that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in
each area of construction.
HVAC INSULATION
623
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials
shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as
acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation:
Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290,
Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ or factory-applied FSK
jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ or
factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
HVAC INSULATION
624
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3
ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive:
Type II, Class I.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b.
c.
d.
e.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4
MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;
comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
HVAC INSULATION
627
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance:
thickness.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible
with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.
3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg. F.
5. Color: White.
2.6
SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
HVAC INSULATION
629
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket:
Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.8
TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
HVAC INSULATION
631
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC INSULATION
632
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
2) GEMCO; CD.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
HVAC INSULATION
633
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC INSULATION
634
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
d. Adhesive:
Recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
5. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel
insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
2.10 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum
according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel
according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
HVAC INSULATION
635
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
HVAC INSULATION
636
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate
and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along
both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
HVAC INSULATION
637
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of
its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged
areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and
seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4
PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through
roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
HVAC INSULATION
638
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
Terminate
HVAC INSULATION
639
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC INSULATION
640
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and
penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a
vapor barrier.
3.6
HVAC INSULATION
642
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly
with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and
trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.7
HVAC INSULATION
644
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC INSULATION
645
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
HVAC INSULATION
646
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a
Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over
the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to
2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end
joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg. F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in
a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over
the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to
2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval
duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.9
FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew
proof.
HVAC INSULATION
648
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC INSULATION
649
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Concealed and exposed, rectangular, supply, return, outdoor, and exhaust-air duct
insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed and exposed, supply, return, outdoor, and exhaust-air plenum insulation
shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are
identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is
listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
HVAC INSULATION
651
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Heating Water:
1. Mineral-Fiber: 1-1/2 inches thick.
3.15 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket,
install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's
option.
C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Smooth 0.024 inch thick for all exposed ducts below 6 feet above
finished floor.
E. Equipment, Concealed:
1. None.
F. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72
Inches:
1. PVC 30 mils thick in mechanical room.
G. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger
Than 72 Inches:
1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1-1/4-Inch- Deep Corrugations 2-1/2-Inch- Deep
Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick in mechanical room.
H. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
HVAC INSULATION
652
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
I. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick in mechanical rooms.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 230700
HVAC INSULATION
653
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and
components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not
supplied with factory-wired controls.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring
equipment that relates to this Section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. I/O: Input/output.
C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing
interoperable control devices and networks.
D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
E. PC: Personal computer.
F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Building has existing facility management system; Niagara with LonWorks. All new
equipment controllers shall be compatible with Niagara.
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device.
Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,
finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of
product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,
manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation
equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors,
actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface
equipment.
2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software,
operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and
size of each field connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model
number.
2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and
control devices.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized
representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components
required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.9
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors
with plans and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and
operator workstation.
C. Variable Air Volume (VAV) terminal units shall be shipped to the controls
manufacturer and provided with factory-mounted controls. Refer to section 233600
"Air Terminal Units".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2.2
CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Control system shall be Open Protocol and be compatible / seamlessly integrate with
existing Niagara system.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control, Niagara System.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements,
interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to
distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on tokenpassing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator
workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-andclick graphics.
D. Local Area Network:
1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC panels shall
directly reside on a local area network such that communications may be executed
directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between
controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis. Controls shall be web based
control system.
2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected
via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and
application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices
via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical
identification of building equipment. Access to system data shall not be restricted
by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware
configuration of the FMS network shall be transparent to the user when accessing
data or developing control programs.
3. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions:
a. High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation
from multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network
devices. The minimum baud rate shall be 1 Megabaud.
b. Support of any combination of controllers and Operator Workstations directly
connected to the local area network.
c. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either
workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include
provisions for automatically re-configuring itself to allow all operational
equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in
the event of single or multiple failures.
d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.
e. Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.
f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms
are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not
respond.
2.3
DDC EQUIPMENT
A. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers.
Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its
operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O
capacity for the application.
1. Configuration:
Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power,
communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card
connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.
2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to
share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics;
monitor system and report failures.
3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and
write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on
network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service
communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.
4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg. F.
5. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg. F.
2.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any
or all of the following energy management routines:
1. Time of Day Scheduling
2. Calendar Based Scheduling
3. Holiday Scheduling
4. Temporary Schedule Overrides
5. Optimal Start
6. Optimal Stop
7. Night Setback Control
8. Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer)
9. Peak Demand Limiting
10. Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
11. Heating/Cooling Interlock
12. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization.
D. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute
custom, job-specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform
calculations and special control routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a
custom process:
a. Any system-measured point data or status.
b. Any calculated data.
c. Any results from other processes.
d. User-Defined Constants.
e. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, / square root, exponential, etc.).
f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.).
g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting
as required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. Ebtron, Inc.
c. Heat-Timer Corporation.
d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f. RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg. F at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected
by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible or 18 inches long, rigid;
use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq.
ft.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum
insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.
b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.
c. Thermometer: Concealed.
d. Orientation: Vertical.
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors:
security screws.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixedor split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for
175 percent of rated motor current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop,
self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale
accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed
voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA
kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at
0.5 power factor.
F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to
match current and system output requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel
and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
2.8
THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erie Controls.
2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
3. Heat-Timer Corporation.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
5. Tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellowsactuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator;
listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg. F setpoint range, and 2 deg. F maximum differential.
1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break
ungrounded conductors.
2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.
F. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate
for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.
2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,
extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.
4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front
of instrument.
5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings
required by application.
6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper
assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing
calibration of instrument.
G. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning
action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
H. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with
adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting
or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
I. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw,
manual-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb
length is equal to or below set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
670
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC."
2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil
immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of
limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running
torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running
torque of 150 in. x lbf. and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke
cycles at rated torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump
differential pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb./sq. ft. of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb./sq. ft. of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb./sq. ft. of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb./sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg. of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg. of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to
3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.
4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,
manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 or 120-V ac.
8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V
dc.
9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position
feedback signal.
10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg. F.
11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg. F.
12. Run Time: 30 seconds.
2.10 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2. Erie Controls.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
672
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
percentage
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator
workstation.
B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are
installed before proceeding with installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features
of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
C. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and
room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
E. Install automatic dampers according to Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct
Accessories."
F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to
outdoor temperatures.
G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Special
Provision 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Special
Provision 232113 "Hydronic Piping."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and
retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and
stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating
control set points are as required.
5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with
sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.
6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
2. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation,
insertion depth, and other applicable considerations.
3. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
4. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify
that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
5. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
6. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
7. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation
and approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
677
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written
recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at
least double that of instrument being calibrated.
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent
output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a
precision-resistant source.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable
differential set at minimum.
7. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span
using a precision-resistance source.
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent
open and closed.
9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and
100 percent closed.
10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type
of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup
procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer
to Special Provision 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 231113 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
C. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual
components and profiles.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the
items involved.
B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks are shown and
coordinated with other services and utilities.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil equipment and accessories to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.8
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fuel-Oil Service: Do not interrupt fuel-oil service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary fuel-oil supply according to
requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
fuel-oil service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fuel-oil service without Owner's written
permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping materials,
installation, testing, and inspecting.
C. Fuel-Oil Valves: Comply with UL 842 and have service mark initials "WOG"
permanently marked on valve body.
D. Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and local authorities having
jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel-oil piping.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
2.3
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Metallic Flexible Connectors:
1. Flexible connectors in first subparagraph below are listed and labeled for fuel-oil
service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, but there is no
UL-applicable standard.
2. Listed and labeled for aboveground applications by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wirereinforcing protective jacket.
4. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig.
5. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping.
6. Maximum Length: 30 inches
7. Items in first two subparagraphs below are optional features.
8. Swivel end, 50-psig maximum operating pressure.
9. Factory-furnished anode for connection to cathodic protection.
B. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom
drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 21/2 and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket
with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Body: Bronze.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg. F.
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape for Threaded Joints: Suitable for fuel oil.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.5
SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Pressure Relief Valves:
1. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
4. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
7. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig.
8. Relief Pressure Setting: 60 psig.
B. Oil Safety Valves:
1. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel.
4. Seat and Diaphragm: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of fuel-oil piping.
B. Examine installation of fuel-burning equipment and fuel-handling and storage
equipment to verify actual locations of piping connections before installing fuel-oil
piping.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping
section.
B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental
ignition.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual fuel-oil shutoff valves on branch connections to fuel-oil appliance.
B. Install valves in accessible locations.
C. Install oil safety valves at inlet of each oil-fired appliance.
D. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return
lines.
E. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points in fuel-oil
piping.
F. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.
G. Install emergency shutoff valves at dispensers.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.7
CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance.
B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.
C. Connect piping to equipment with shutoff valve and union. Install union between
valve and equipment.
D. Install flexible piping connectors at final connection to burners or oil-fired appliances.
3.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.10
3.11
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 231113
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 231213 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Duplex fuel-oil pumps.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual
components and profiles.
2. Include, where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fuel-oil pumps.
1. Include construction details and dimensions of individual components for fueloil pumps.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil pumps and fuel-oil maintenance
systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maximum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 3-psig fuel-oil supply pressure at oil-fired
appliances.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Seven-day schedule.
Alternate pumps to equalize run time.
Alarm motor failure.
Manual reset dry-run protection.
Stop pumps if fuel level falls below pump suction.
De-energize and sound alarm for pump, locked-rotor condition.
Sound alarm for open circuit and for high and low voltage.
Lights shall indicate normal power on, run, and off conditions.
Interface with automatic control system. Comply with requirements in Special
Provision 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" to control and
indicate the following:
a. Start/stop pump set when required by schedule or fuel-fired appliance
operation.
b. Operating status.
c. Alarm off-normal status.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Piping Furnished with Pumps: Steel with ferrous fittings and threaded or welded
joints.
F. Strainers Furnished with Pumps: Duplex, basket type with stainless steel-screen
baskets.
2.3
MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Special Provision 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2. Unusual Service Conditions:
a. High humidity.
3. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for fuel-oil pumps to verify actual locations of pump
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping
section.
B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental
ignition.
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Install pumps with access space for periodic maintenance including removal of
motors, impellers, and accessories.
2. Set pumps on and anchor to concrete base.
3. Pump Mounting:
a. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.
Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in
Special Provision 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
b. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
B. Install suction piping with minimum fittings and change of direction.
C. Install vacuum and pressure gage, upstream and downstream, respectively, at each
pump to measure the differential pressure across the pump. Pressure gages are
specified in Special Provision 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.4
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fuel-oil pumps.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 231213
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for
the following:
1. Hot-water heating piping.
2. Makeup-water piping.
3. Condensate-drain piping.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. All piping listed in Summary.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
HYDRONIC PIPING
698
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding:
Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products,
and installation.
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the
following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg. F.
2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg. F.
HYDRONIC PIPING
699
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
2.3
2.4
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
piping system contents.
HYDRONIC PIPING
700
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered
joints.
B. Hot-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel
flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered
joints.
D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper
fittings, and soldered joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
701
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved
on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install valves according to Special Provision 230523 "General-Duty Valves for
HVAC Piping."
HYDRONIC PIPING
702
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
Q. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
R. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.
S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs
U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.3
3.4
HYDRONIC PIPING
703
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5
HYDRONIC PIPING
704
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants
on bolt threads.
3.6
3.7
HYDRONIC PIPING
705
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
707
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the
following:
1. Hot-water heating piping.
2. Makeup-water piping.
3. Condensate-drain piping.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing
for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
2. Air-control devices.
3. Hydronic specialties.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-control devices, hydronic specialties, and
special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the
following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg. F.
2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg. F.
3. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system
to which it is attached.
2.2
VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified
in Special Provision 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed,
with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
2.3
AIR-CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manual Air Vents:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.
d. Nexus Valve, Inc.
e. Taco, Inc.
2. Body: Bronze.
3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
7. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg. F.
B. Automatic Air Vents:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.
d. Nexus Valve, Inc.
e. Taco, Inc.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply
connection to each piece of equipment.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 232116
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and
rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller
dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's
operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.
1. Show pump layout and connections.
2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts
and other anchorages.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
717
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HYDRONIC PUMPS
718
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and
outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange
connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed
to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim
impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat
held by a stainless-steel spring, and bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on
shaft between motor and seal.
5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Special Provision 230513
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2.2
HYDRONIC PUMPS
719
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before pump installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by
pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and
spring hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.
1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Special
Provision 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to
pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump
nozzles.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
721
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot
liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do
not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
722
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic
pumps.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 232123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
723
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning
applications.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.
Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe,
tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of
horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment
connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and
equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and
design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe
and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation
difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure
proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
724
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REFRIGERANT PIPING
725
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
REFRIGERANT PIPING
726
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel supprt.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for
pressure differential measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa).
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg. F (116 deg. C).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REFRIGERANT PIPING
728
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop
Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
729
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
3.5
REFRIGERANT PIPING
731
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8
inch (9.5 mm).
7. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
3.6
REFRIGERANT PIPING
732
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results
are achieved.
3.7
SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers
(67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14
kPa).
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.8
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
B. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning controllers to the system design
temperature.
C. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system,
according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
3. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
4. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
D. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after
design flow rates and pressures are established.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
733
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 232300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
734
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Duct liner.
5. Sealants and gaskets.
6. Hangers and supports.
7. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Related Special Provision Sections:
1. Special Provision 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control
devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
METAL DUCTS
735
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of
gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
3. Sheet metal.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure
classes.
4. Elevation of top of ducts.
5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
6. Fittings.
7. Reinforcement and spacing.
8. Seam and joint construction.
9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access
doors and panels.
12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and
vibration isolation.
METAL DUCTS
736
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses.
2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.
3. Reinforcement details and spacing.
4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general
construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate
proposed changes to duct layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
B. Welding Qualifications:
following:
METAL DUCTS
737
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
METAL DUCTS
738
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded
longitudinal seams.
2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with
butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3
METAL DUCTS
739
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Stainless Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as
indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed
surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct
Schedule" Article.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill
finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces
exposed to view.
E. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:
1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct.
An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface.
2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered
by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H,
minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 3363.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723;
certified by an NRTL.
5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: White.
6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner
treated with antimicrobial coating.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;
black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce
aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or
EPDM gasket materials.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.4
DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B;
and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
METAL DUCTS
740
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METAL DUCTS
742
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher
than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at
uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall
open area of 23 percent.
10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,
turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat
sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used; secure buildouts to
duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
2.5
METAL DUCTS
743
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg., positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.
3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.
4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.
5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.
6. Water resistant.
7. Mold and mildew resistant.
8. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.
10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
METAL DUCTS
744
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METAL DUCTS
745
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets,
swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and
clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used
to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for
other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
METAL DUCTS
746
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct
Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials.
3.2
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
METAL DUCTS
747
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure
class if required for cleaning and coating access. Provide insulated panels for
insulated and/or lined duct. Patch duct as recommended by duct manufacturer.
Comply with Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels
and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
METAL DUCTS
748
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed
from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and
other points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers
and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums
and mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
2. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of ducts or duct accessories.
3. Clean fibrous-glass duct with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct to
get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated
or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
METAL DUCTS
749
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METAL DUCTS
750
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Special
Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.7
PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do
not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible
galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
painting Sections.
3.8
METAL DUCTS
751
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
e. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg. or Higher: Test
representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed,
totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated
pressure class.
3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage
testing and for compliance with test requirements.
4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or
section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum
design operating pressure.
6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and
Restoration of HVAC Systems."
a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter
media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9
START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Special Provision 230593 "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METAL DUCTS
755
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233113
METAL DUCTS
756
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual volume dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Flange connectors.
6. Turning vanes.
7. Duct-mounted access doors.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Flexible ducts.
10. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Fire-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors
and remote damper operators.
d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items
involved.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Ruskin Company.
6. SEMCO Incorporated.
7. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E. Frame: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting
flange.
F. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
2. Maximum Width: 6 inches.
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.
G. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
H. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: Synthetic.
L. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
761
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Trox USA Inc.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
3. McGill AirFlow LLC.
4. METALAIRE, Inc.
5. Nailor Industries Inc.
6. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7. Ruskin Company.
8. Vent Products Company, Inc.
9. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg. static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm
velocity.
D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper
frame must comply with sleeve requirements.
G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade
connectors.
I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg. F rated, fusible links.
2.6
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. METALAIRE, Inc.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet
steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for
duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with
perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4,
"Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.9
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or
0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
F. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg. F.
G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the
filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg. F.
2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically
wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg. positive and 1.0-inch wg. negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg. F.
4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
768
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible
to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner
with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Upstream from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers,
and equipment.
6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be
pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors
installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed
downstream from dampers.
7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
8. Upstream from turning vanes.
9. Control devices requiring inspection.
10. Elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
770
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233300
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Utility set fans.
2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
4. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
5. In-line centrifugal fans.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for
each type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and
size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale,
on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on
input from installers of the items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in .
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Special Provision 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock
seam or welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.
2. Coatings: Thickness of 4.0-6.0 mils, Hi Pro Polyester topcoat with zinc-rich
epoxy base coat, applied to housing and impeller.
C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and
spun-steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball
bearings with ABMA 9, L10 of 80,000 hours.
1. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
F. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation
2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for
use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
G. Accessories:
1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged.
2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
3. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1. Greenheck.
2. Loren Cook Company.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. PennBarry.
B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for
concealed in-line applications.
C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
D. Direct Drive Fans (where applicable):
1. Electronically commutated motor (ECM).
2. Motor enclosures: Open type.
3. Motor shall be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically
designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable.
Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacity
(PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start, and 3 phase induction type motors.
4. Motor shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with
the fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase.
5. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power
to operate the motor.
6. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown).
Speed shall be controlled either by a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or
by a 0-10 VDC signal. Provide mounted potentiometer, regardless of control
methodology.
7. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.
E. Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew
attachment to fan housing.
F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and
receptacle for motor plug-in.
G. Accessories:
1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot
light.
2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
3. Manufacturer's standard transition fittings.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
781
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Backdraft damper.
2.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Special Provision 230513
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using restrained elastomeric mounts or spring isolators having a static
deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Special Provision
230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
1. Secure vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete
base.
C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to
Special Provision 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Special Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Label units according to requirements specified in Special Provision 230553
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Special Provision 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Special Provision 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Refer to Special Provision 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Item 8002
Item 8003
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233423
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities,
furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.
1. Air terminal units.
B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and
vibration isolation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
casings or galvannealed steel casings with a baked enamel paint finish may be used as an
alternative. The terminal casing shall be mechanically assembled (spot-welded
1. casings are not acceptable). Casing shall be double wall construction using a 22
gauge G90 galvanized metal liner with a chrome finish covering all insulation and
internally lined with 1/2-inch thick, 4 pound per cubic foot skin, dual density
fiberglass insulation, complying with NFPA 90A. Minimum thermal conductivity
shall be 0.24. Insulation must meet all requirements of UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Raw
insulation edges on the discharge of the unit must be covered with metal liner to
eliminate flaking of insulation during field duct connections. Simple "buttering" of
raw edges with an approved sealant is not acceptable. All appurtenances
including control assemblies and hot water heating coils shall not extend beyond
the top and bottom of the unit casing. At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm, the static
pressure drop across the basic terminal shall not exceed .08" W.G. for all unit sizes.
Terminal shall have bottom access plate for cleaning.
D. Primary Air Valve: The primary air valve shall consist of a minimum 22 gauge
cylindrical body that includes embossment rings for rigidity. The damper blade shall be
connected to a solid shaft by means of an integral molded sleeve which does not require
screw or bolt fasteners. The shaft shall be manufactured of a low thermal conducting
composite material, and include a molded damper position indicator visible from the
exterior of the unit. The damper shall pivot in self-lubricating bearings. The damper
actuator shall be mounted on the exterior of the terminal for ease of service. The valve
assembly shall include internal mechanical stops for both full open and closed positions.
The damper blade seal shall be secured without use of adhesives. The air valve leakage
shall not exceed 1 percent of maximum inlet rated airflow at 3" W.G. inlet pressure.
E. Primary Airflow Sensor (Pressure Independent): Differential pressure airflow sensor
shall traverse the duct using the equal cross sectional area or log-linear traverse method
along two perpendicular diameters. Single axis sensor shall not be acceptable for duct
diameters 6" or larger. A minimum of 12 total pressure sensing points shall be utilized.
The total pressure inputs shall be average using a pressure chamber located at the center
of the sensor. A sensor that delivers the differential pressure signal from one end of the
sensor is not acceptable. The sensor shall output an amplified differential pressure
signal that is at least 2.5 times the equivalent velocity pressure signal obtained from a
conventional pitot tube. The sensor shall develop a differential pressure of 0.03" W.G.
at an air velocity of. 450 fpm. Documentation shall be submitted which substantiates
this requirement. Brass balancing taps and airflow calibration charts shall be provided
for field airflow requirements.
1. Hot Water Coil: Single duct terminal shall include- an integral hot water coil where
indicated on the plans. The coil shall be manufactured by the terminal unit
manufacturer and shall have a minimum 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal casing
with a minimum G90 zinc coating. Stainless steel casings or galvannealed steel
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
789
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
casings with a baked enamel paint finish, may be used as an alternative. Coil to be
constructed of pure aluminum fins with full fin collars to assure accurate fin spacing
and maximum tube contact.
F. Controls: Terminal shall be equipped with factory mounted direct digital control (DDC)
furnished by the automatic temperature control (ATC) contractor.
2.2
2.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal
service and maintenance.
C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Special Provision 232113 "Hydronic
Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and
union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
C. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Special Provision 233113 "Metal
Ducts."
D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with
requirements in Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and
minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Special Provision
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and
warning signs and labels.
3.5
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit
manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
4. Verify that control connections are complete.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233600
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Round diffusers.
Square ceiling diffusers.
Adjustable bar registers and grilles.
Fixed face registers and grilles.
Linear bar diffusers.
Linear slot diffusers.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items
involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DIFFUSERS
A. Round Diffuser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Carnes.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.
c. Nailor Industries Inc.
d. Price Industries.
e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Style: Multiple cones.
Mounting: Duct connection.
Pattern: Two-position horizontal.
Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm) or as indicated.
Face Style: As indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Arrangement: as indicated.
Core Construction: Integral.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
Carnes.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Tuttle & Bailey.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or
other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final
location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233713
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 233723 - HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Structural Performance: Ventilators shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of ventilator components, noise or metal fatigue caused by
ventilator blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind
pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa),
acting inward or outward.
C.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100
deg. C), material surfaces.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D.
1.4
Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE
62.1.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvered-penthouse ventilators
specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models
with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B.
Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
ventilator attachments to curbs, and curb attachments to roof structure.
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water
intrusion.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E.
F.
G.
Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.
2. Sizes and locations of roof openings.
H.
1.5
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations
with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as
required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required
finish.
C.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
phosphatized.
D.
E.
Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined
materials.
2.2
F.
G.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
B.
Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
C.
Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and
secured.
D.
E.
ROOF HOODS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40mm-) thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm)
wood nailer. Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.
1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches (300 mm).
E.
Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04mm) wire.
F.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish:
Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,
with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and an overall
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
a.
Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.4
GOOSENECKS
A.
B.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40mm-) thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm)
wood nailer. Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.
1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches (300 mm).
C.
Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04mm) wire.
D.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Install goosenecks on curb base where throat size exceeds 9 by 9 inches (230 by 230
mm).
C.
D.
Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.
Comply with Division 07 Special Provision Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied
during installation.
F.
G.
H.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes
so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the
field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 233723
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Listed single- and double-wall vents and chimneys.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Building-heating-appliance chimneys.
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks.
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Include plans,
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Welding certificates.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M,
"Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents,
breechings, and stacks.
C. Certified Sizing Calculations:
calculations.
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural
failures caused by expansion and contraction.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLICATION
A. Listed Building-Heating-Appliance Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers and water heaters.
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according
to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of
vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.
2. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain
connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain.
3. Lap joints in direction of flow.
4. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number
recommended by manufacturer.
5. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and
smooth interior finish.
6. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch (25 mm) out of
plumb from top to bottom.
3.4
CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris.
Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth
and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not
completed or connected to equipment.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 235100
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 235223 - CAST-IRON BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled,
oil-fired, cast-iron boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators
and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source quality-control test reports.
CAST-IRON BOILERS
813
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency
according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B,
Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of
Furnaces and Boilers."
E. I=B=R Compliance: Boilers shall be tested and rated according to HI's "Rating
Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with
I=B=R emblem on a nameplate affixed to boiler.
F. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 726 and UL 795. Boilers shall
be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace controls and heat exchangers of boilers that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Controls: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
CAST-IRON BOILERS
814
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Burnham Hydronics.
2. Hydrotherm, Inc./Mestek, Inc.
3. Peerless Boilers.
4. Smith Cast Iron Boilers.
5. Weil-McLain.
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory fabricated.
1. Cast-iron sections shall be sealed pressure tight and held together with tie rods;
including insulated jacket and flue-gas vent connection.
B. Cast-Iron Section Design:
1. Sectional Joints: High-temperature sealant to seal flue-gas passages not in contact
with heating medium, and held together with tie rods.
2. Drain and blowdown tappings.
3. Return injection tube to equalize water flow to all sections.
4. Crown inspection tappings with brass plugs.
5. Built-in air separator.
C. Combustion Chamber: Equipped with ceramic-fiber target wall and flame observation
ports, front and back.
CAST-IRON BOILERS
815
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Casing:
1. Jacket: Galvanized sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures and bakedenamel or powder-coated protective finish.
2. Insulation: Minimum 1-inch thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat
exchanger.
3. Combustion Chamber Access: Refractory lined, hinged, front.
4. Access: For cleaning between cast-iron sections.
5. Draft Hood: Flue canopy and flue connection shall be constructed of stainless
steel containing adjustable outlet damper assembly.
6. Insulated base constructed of aluminized steel to permit boiler to be installed on
combustible floor.
7. Mounting Frame: Steel rails to mount assembled boiler package on concrete base.
8. Control Cabinet: Sheet metal casing shall cover all controls, gas train, and burner.
2.3
CAST-IRON BOILERS
816
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Oil Pump: Two-stage, gear-type oil pump integral to and directly driven by
blower shall be capable of producing 300-psig discharge pressure and 15-inch Hg
vacuum.
2. Oil Piping Specialties:
a. Suction-line, manual, gate valve.
b. Removable-mesh oil strainer.
c. 0- to 30-inch Hg vacuum; 0- to 30-psig vacuum-pressure gage.
d. 0- to 300-psig oil-nozzle pressure gage.
e. Nozzle-line, solenoid-safety-shutoff oil valve.
D. Gas Train: Control devices and modulating control sequence shall comply with
requirements in ASME CSD-1 and UL.
E. Gas Ignition System: The burner ignition system, which will light either the main gas
or oil flame, shall utilize propane gas as the fuel source. The gas pilot system
components shall include spark ignited pilot assembly, 6000 Volt ignition
transformer, pilot solenoid valve, pilot gas pressure regulator and manual gas shutoff
cock. The flame proving system shall incorporate an Ultra-Violet flame detector,
which will monitor both the pilot and main flames. The pilot assembly shall fit
within the confines of the blast tube - avoiding special burner front plate pilot cut
outs.
F. Oil Ignition System: To insure total fuel independence, the main oil flame shall be
ignited by a 10,000-Volt direct spark oil ignition system.
G. Flue-Gas Recirculation: Burner connections shall be equipped for recirculating flue
gas.
1. Maximum Oxides of Nitrogen Emissions: 30 ppm.
2.4
CAST-IRON BOILERS
817
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TRIM
A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch diameter, combination waterpressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.
E. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) hose-end gate valve.
2.6
CONTROLS
A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
1. Control transformer.
CAST-IRON BOILERS
818
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
ELECTRICAL POWER
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in electrical Sections.
B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor
controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a singlepoint field power connection to boiler.
1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.
5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with disconnect switch
or circuit breaker.
6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
2.8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).
B. Install oil-fired boilers according to NFPA 31.
CAST-IRON BOILERS
820
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect oil piping full size to burner inlet with shutoff valve and union.
D. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
F. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be
at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
3.3
CAST-IRON BOILERS
821
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set
points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
CAST-IRON BOILERS
822
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 235223
CAST-IRON BOILERS
823
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision includes packaged, refrigerant compressor and condenser units.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each compressor and condenser unit. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include
equipment dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method of
field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
B. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For compressor and condenser units indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor
bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
for designing vibration isolation bases.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressor and condenser units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard
for Refrigeration Systems."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
Compliance:
Applicable
requirements
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
in
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Special Provision 077200 "Roof Accessories."
B. Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins.
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Compressor failure.
b. Condenser coil leak.
2. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period (Components Other Than Compressor): One year from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
H. Accessories:
1. Low-Ambient Controller: Cycles condenser fan to permit operation down to 0
deg. F with time-delay relay to bypass low-pressure switch.
2. Gage Panel: Package with refrigerant circuit suction and discharge gages.
3. Part-winding-start timing relay, circuit breakers, and contactors.
I. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for
components and controls and with removable panels for required access to
compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include
the following:
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
827
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces; treated and finished
to withstand at least 2,500 hours salt spray test, with no visible corrosive effects,
when tested in accordance with ASTM B117-95 test procedure.
2. Perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes to facilitate rigging.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Condenser coil grille.
2.2
MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Special Provision 230513
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
compressor and condenser units.
B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections before equipment installation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where compressor and
condenser units will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
B. Install roof-mounting units on equipment
Provision 077200 "Roof Accessories."
supports
specified
in
Special
C. Equipment Mounting:
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are
not factory mounted.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled compressor and condenser units; maintain
required access to unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant
piping and specialties are specified in Special Provision 232300 "Refrigerant Piping."
3.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system with refrigerant and oil and test for
leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor operation and unit operation, product capability, and
compliance with requirements.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
5. Verify proper airflow over coils.
C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
D. Compressor and condenser units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and perform the following:
a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.
b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.
e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
f. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
B. Lubricate bearings on fan motors.
C. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or
binding.
D. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
E. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete
manufacturer's startup checklist.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Measure and record airflow and air temperature rise over coils.
G. Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device.
H. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
I. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain compressor and condenser units.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 236200
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING
UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Variable-air-volume, air-handling units.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation details, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of
withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints
exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within
completed casings.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.
2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements.
2. Support location, type, and weight.
3. Field measurements.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation
of air-handling units and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and
labeled by ARI.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
Compliance:
Applicable
requirements
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
in
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual
equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AAON, Inc
2. CES Group.
3. Daikin Applied.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Indoor air handling units shall include filters, supply fans, DX evaporator coil, hot
water coil, mixing box, and unit controls.
2. Unit shall have a draw-through supply fan configuration and discharge air
horizontally.
3. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the DX coil,
leak testing of the hot water coil, and run testing of the supply fans and factory
wired electrical system. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit.
4. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and
caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
5. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system
components and electrical and controls components.
6. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
7. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and
shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartments hinged access door.
8. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the
exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartments hinged
access door.
B. Construction
1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact
resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.
2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 6.25. Foam
insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D1929-11 for a minimum flash ignition
temperature of 610F.
3. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides
and a thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents
moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents
heat transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.
4. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet.
Sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings
to reduce air leakage. Piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall
include sealing to reduce air leakage.
5. Access to filters, cooling coil, heating coil, supply fans, and electrical and controls
components shall be through hinged access doors.
6. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry. Coil access door and supply fan
access door shall include quarter-turn lockable handles. Supply fan access door
shall include removable pin hinges.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.
Blower and motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced.
Blower and motor assembly shall be isolated with neoprene gasket.
Motor shall be a high efficiency electronically commutated motor (ECM).
E. Cooling Coil
1. Evaporator Coil
a. Coil shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of
copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and
aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.
b. Coil shall two circuits and interlaced circuitry.
c. Coil shall be 6 row high capacity and 12 fins per inch.
d. Coil shall be hydrogen or helium leak tested.
e. Coil shall be furnished with factory installed thermostatic expansion valves.
The sensing bulbs shall be field installed on the suction line immediately
outside the cabinet.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
836
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
f. Coil shall have right hand external piping connections. Liquid and suction
connections shall be sweat connection. Coil connections shall be labeled,
extend beyond the unit casing, and be factory sealed on both the interior and
exterior of the unit casing, to minimize air leakage.
F. Refrigeration System
1. Air handling unit and matching condensing unit shall be capable of operation as
an R-410A split system air conditioner.
2. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve
type refrigerant flow control.
G. Heating Coil
1. Hot Water Heating Coil
a. Coil shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and be
hydrogen or helium leak tested.
b. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave
rippled.
c. Coil shall have quarter serpentine circuitry, 1 row and 12 fins per inch.
d. Coil shall have right hand external piping connections. Supply and return
connections shall be sweat connection. Coil connections shall be labeled,
extend beyond the unit casing and be factory sealed on both the interior and
exterior of the unit casing, to minimize air leakage.
e. Control valves shall be field supplied and field installed.
f. Coils shall be located in the preheat position upstream of the cooling coil.
H. Filters
1. Unit shall include 2 inch thick, disposable pleated panel pre-filters with an
ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 8, and 4 inch thick pleated
panel final filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 85% and MERV rating of 13,
upstream of the cooling coil.
2. Unit shall include a clogged filter switch.
3. Filter gage shall be 3-1/2-inch diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.
Gage shall include vent valves, black figures on white background, front
recalibration adjustment, and 2 percent full scale accuracy. Range for filters with
a final resistance less than 1.0-inch shall be 0- to 1.0-inch wg. For filters with a
final resistance greater than 1.0-inch and less than 2.0-inch, range shall be 0- to
2.0-inch wg.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
837
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
I. Mixing Box
1. Unit shall contain a mixing box with front return air opening and top outside air
opening.
2. Return air opening shall contain an adjustable, motor operated outside air damper
assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with
rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven.
Dampers shall be fixed position controlled by a fully modulating actuator.
3. Outside air opening shall contain an adjustable, motor operated outside air damper
assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with
rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven.
Dampers shall be fixed position controlled by a fully modulating actuator.
4. Damper leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, Laboratory Methods for Testing
Dampers for Rating, shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face
velocity through damper and 4-inch wg. pressure differential.
J. Controls
1. Unit shall be provided with an external control panel with separate low voltage
control wiring with conduit and high voltage power wiring with conduit between
the control panel and the unit. Control panel shall be field mounted.
2. Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller
a. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the
unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and
factory tested.
b. Controller shall be capable of standalone operation with unit configuration, set
point adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and occupancy
scheduling available without dependence on a building management system.
c. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for
occupancy scheduling.
d. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values
without the use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.
e. Variable Air Volume Controller
1) Unit shall utilize a variable capacity cooling system and a variable
speed supply fan system to modulate cooling and airflow as required
to meet space temperature cooling loads and to save operating
energy. Supply fan speed shall modulate based on supply air duct
static pressure. Cooling capacity shall modulate based on supply air
temperature.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2)
3)
f. Unit configuration, set point adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm
viewing, and occupancy scheduling shall be accomplished with connection to
interface module with LCD screen and input keypad, interface module with
touch screen, or with connection to PC with free configuration software.
Controller shall be capable of connection with other factory installed and
factory provided unit controllers with individual unit configuration, set point
adjustment, sensor status viewing, and occupancy scheduling available from a
single unit. Connection between unit controllers shall be with a modular cable.
Controller shall be capable of communicating and integrating with a
LonWorks or BACnet network.
2.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit
installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and
electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Special
Provision 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
B. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation
devices specified in Special Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
service and maintenance.
D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount
filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide
filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and
downstream of filters.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and
switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth
bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt
guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with
factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
8. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
9. Install new, clean filters.
10. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing airhandling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean
air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean
filters.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 237333.16 - INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND
VENTILATING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision includes indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating units.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating
and ventilating unit.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating
and ventilating unit.
1. Signed, sealed, and prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas-fired heating and ventilating units, as well
as procedures and diagrams.
5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
for designing vibration isolation bases.
6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Startup service reports.
B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired heating and ventilating units to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
Compliance:
Applicable
requirements
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
in
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.9
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect,
gas-fired heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following;
1. AAON, Inc.
2. CES Group
3. Seasons-4
2.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan,
controls, filters, and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed inside the building.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.3
UNIT DESCRIPTION
A. General Description
1. Air handling units shall include filters, supply fans, dampers, gas heaters, exhaust
fans, energy recovery wheels and unit controls.
2. Unit shall be factory assembled or shipped as individual modules with run testing
of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the
controls compartments literature pocket.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and
caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
4. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system
components and electrical and controls components.
5. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
6. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and
shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartments access door.
7. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the
exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartments access
door.
B. Construction
1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact
resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.
2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13 (R-value
of R-6.5). Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot
and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929-11 for a minimum flash
ignition temperature of 610F.
3. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides
and a thermal break.
4. Access to filters, dampers, heaters, supply fans, exhaust fans, energy recovery
wheels, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access
doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles and removable pin hinges.
5. Unit base rails shall be 6 inches tall.
6. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the bottom of the unit.
7. Unit shall include factory wired control panel compartment LED service lights.
C. Electrical
1. Unit shall be provided with standard power block for connecting power to the
unit.
2. Options:
a. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired, non-fused
disconnect switch.
b. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired 115V, 15 amp
GFI outlet with outlet disconnect switch in the unit control panel.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down
all motors in the unit if the electrical phases are more that 10% out of balance
on voltage, the voltage is more that 10% under design voltage, or on phase
reversal.
D. Supply Fans
1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.
3. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber-inshear isolators.
4. Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000
hours service with external lubrication points.
5. Options:
a. Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan
motors shall be premium efficiency.
E. Exhaust Fans
1. Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100% relief.
2. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum exhaust fans.
3. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber-inshear isolators.
4. Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000
hours service with external lubrication points.
5. Options:
a. Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan
motors shall be premium efficiency.
E. Gas Heating
1. Unit shall include an indirect fired, gas furnace with 5:1 turndown capability.
2. Gas furnace shall be located in the reheat position downstream of the supply fans.
3. Heat exchanger shall carry a 25 year prorated warranty from the date of original
equipment shipment from the factory.
4. Gas furnace shall consist of multiple heat exchanger tubes of Type 409 stainless
steel, an induced draft blower and an electronic pressure switch to lockout the gas
valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion air flow is
established.
5. Gas furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of a direct spark
electronic igniter and remote flame sensor to prove carryover across all burners.
6. Gas furnace shall have a manual reset flame rollout switch and automatic reset
high limit switch to limit maximum outlet air temperature to less than 250F.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7. Gas furnace shall include an integral 1/8 NPT tapped test gauge connection in
the gas manifold for measuring gas pressure to burners.
8. Unit shall include a single gas connection and have gas supply piping entrances in
the outside cabinet wall below the access door of the gas heat module.
9. Options:
a. Gas furnace shall have an open (sealed) combustion air inlet.
F. Filters
1. Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel filters with an ASHRAE efficiency
of 30% and MERV rating of 8.
2. Unit shall include a clogged filter switch.
G. Energy Recovery
1. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The
energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel
drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service
and removal from the cabinet.
2. The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated
cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt.
3. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an
ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure dropto-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in aluminum and
stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix.
4. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame
construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated
and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place.
Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance
and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of
400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall
be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks.
5. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly
and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for
wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.
6. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized
Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an
Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the
cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal
performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard
INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS
850
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Unit shall be provided with a terminal block for field installation of a smoke
detector which shuts of the units control circuit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment installation.
C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils,
turning vanes, fan wheels, and other components.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:
B. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
C. Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
D. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with
indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Special Provision 231126 "Facility
Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping." Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and
union and with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. Make final
connections of gas piping to unit with corrugated, stainless-steel tubing flexible
connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26 equipment connections.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Drain: Comply with requirements in Special Provision 221316 "Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping" for traps and accessories on piping connections to condensate drain pans
under condensing heat exchangers.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for
service and maintenance.
D. Duct Connections: Connect ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units with
flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors.
E. Ground equipment according to Special Provision 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
F. Connect wiring according to Special Provision 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and perform the following:
a. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber.
b. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.
c. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Calibrate thermostats.
Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.
Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration,
and normal and emergency shutdown.
10. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
11. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes.
Inspect the following:
a. High-limit heat.
b. Alarms.
3. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication,
and adjust belt tension.
4. Verify drain-pan performance.
B. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 237433 - DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision includes factory-packaged units capable of supplying up to 100
percent outdoor air and providing heating.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
3. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer:
a. Mounting Details: For securing and flashing roof curb to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
b. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of vibration isolation and wind restraints,
including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Unit fabrication and assembly details.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof-curb mounting details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Size and location of unit-mounted rails and anchor points and methods for
anchoring units to roof curb.
2. Required roof penetrations for ducts, pipes, and electrical raceways, including
size and location of each penetration.
B. Startup service reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.6
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AAON, Inc.
2. CES Group.
3. Seasons-4.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Description
1. Outdoor air handling unit shall include filters, supply fan, dampers, gas heater (as
applicable), hydronic heating coil (as applicable), exhaust fan, energy recovery
wheel, and unit controls.
2. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including run testing of the completed
unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the service compartments
literature pocket.
3. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and
caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
4. Unit components shall be labeled, including electrical and controls components.
5. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet.
6. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
7. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and
shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartments hinged access door.
8. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the
exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartments hinged
access door.
B. Construction
1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact
resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13. Foam
insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition
temperature of 610F.
3. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides
and a thermal break.
4. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet.
Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the
minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 210/240. Panel
deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a
maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage.
Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width.
Continuous sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors
and openings to reduce air leakage. Piping and electrical conduit through cabinet
panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage.
5. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall
have rain break overhangs above access doors.
6. Access to filters, dampers, heater, exhaust fan, energy recovery wheel, and
electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with
quarter turn, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be
included on the doors.
7. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no
visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in
accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.
8. Unit shall be provided with through the base vertical discharge and return air
openings. All openings through the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2
inch around the opening.
9. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit.
10. Unit shall include factory wired service compartment LED service lights.
C. Electrical
1. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and factory wired 115V, 13 amp
GFI outlet disconnect switch in the unit control panel.
2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down all
motors in the unit if the electrical phases are more than 10% out of balance on
voltage, the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal.
D. Supply Fans
1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward-curved, plenum supply fans.
DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS
860
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of
400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel.
All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly
and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for
wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.
The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized
Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an
Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the
cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal
performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard
1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall
be listed in the AHRI Certified Products.
Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty, from
the date of original equipment shipment from the factory.
Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel outside air and exhaust air filters
with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 8, upstream of the
wheels.
Hinged service access door shall allow access to the wheel.
Total energy recovery wheel shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently
bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade
desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not
degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal
environments. Coated wheel shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil
cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of
water or high humidity.
K. Controls
1. Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller
a. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the
unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and
factory tested. Controller shall be capable of standalone operation with unit
configuration, set point adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing,
and occupancy scheduling available without dependence on a building
management system.
b. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for
occupancy scheduling.
c. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values
without the use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine roof curbs and equipment supports for suitable conditions where units will
be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units
and moving to final locations.
B. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure according to "The NRCA Roofing
Manual."
1. Install and secure units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing
with roof construction.
2. Coordinate size, installation, and structural capacity of roof curbs, equipment
supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Special
Provision 077200 "Roof Accessories."
3. Coordinate size, location, and installation of unit manufacturer's roof curbs and
equipment supports with roof Installer.
C. Restrained Curb Support: Install restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails on roof
structure according to "The NRCA Roofing Manual."
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
E. Install wall- and duct-mounted sensors furnished by manufacturer for field
installation. Install control wiring and make final connections to control devices and
unit control panel.
F. Comply with requirements for gas-fired furnace installation in NFPA 54, "National
Fuel Gas Code."
G. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
H. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
I. Install drain pipes from unit drain pans to sanitary drain.
1. Drain Piping: Drawn-temper copper water tubing complying with ASTM B 88,
Type L, with soldered joints.
2. Pipe Size: Same size as condensate drain pan connection.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to units, allow space for service and maintenance.
B. Gas Piping Connections:
1. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 231126 "Facility LiquefiedPetroleum Gas Piping."
2. Connect gas piping to furnace, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with
union, pressure regulator, and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner
removal and service.
3. Install AGA-approved flexible connectors.
C. Hydronic Piping Connections:
1. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and
Special Provision 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties."
2. Install shutoff valve and union or flange on each supply connection and install
balancing valve and union or flange on each return connection.
D. Duct Connections:
1. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 233113 "Metal Ducts."
2. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts.
3. Connect ducts to units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements
for flexible duct connectors in Special Provision 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements for power wiring, switches, and
motor controls in electrical Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished by unit manufacturer but not factory mounted.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Inspect units for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and
adjust burner for peak efficiency:
a. Measure gas pressure at manifold.
b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
c. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
d. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and
oxygen concentration.
e. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum
firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
4. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure
modes. Inspect the following:
a. High-limit heat exchanger.
b. Alarms.
5. Inspect units for visible damage.
6. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.
7. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Verify that filters are installed.
10. Clean coils and inspect for construction debris.
11. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
12. Inspect operation of power vents.
13. Purge gas line.
14. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators.
15. Verify bearing lubrication.
16. Clean fans and inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction
without vibration and binding.
17. Start unit.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including
response to smoke detectors by fan controls and fire alarm.
19. Operate unit for run-in period.
20. Calibrate controls.
21. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
22. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with exhaust-air
dampers.
23. Verify operational sequence of controls.
24. Measure and record the following airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume.
b. Exhaust-air flow.
c. Outdoor-air flow.
B. After startup, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension.
C. Remove and replace components that do not properly operate and repeat startup
procedures as specified above.
D. Prepare written report of the results of startup services.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 237433
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 238123.13 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS, CEILINGMOUNTED UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision includes ceiling-mounted, computer-room air conditioners.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. COP: Coefficient of performance.
B. EER: Energy efficiency ratio.
C. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
and finishes for computer-room air-conditioning units.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For computer-room air conditioners.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, using
input from installers of the items involved.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For computer-room air conditioners to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of computerroom air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Parts, Including Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but
not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Data Aire. Inc.
2. Liebert Corporation.
3. Stulz Air Technology Systems, Inc.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shell to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
Division 1.
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of
cabinet, fan, filters, and controls.
1. Mounting Configuration: Fit T-bar in lay-in ceiling opening.
B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel serviceable from one side, with baked-enamel finish,
insulated with 1/2-inch-thick duct liner, and mounting bracket attached to the unit.
1. Unit with 24-by-48-inch air distribution plenum, with integral MERV 8 filter and
three-way air distribution.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where computer-room air
conditioners will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Layout and install computer-room air conditioners and suspension system
coordinated with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
assemblies.
B. Suspended Computer-Room Air Conditioners: Install using continuous-thread hanger
rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of computer-room air
conditioner.
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Special
Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC." Fabricate brackets or
supports as required.
2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Special
Provision 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser Mounting: Install using elastomeric mounts
Anchored to equipment stand. Completed assembly shall withstand 100 MPH
sustained wind load. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices
specified in Special Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other heating, ventilating, and airconditioning Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to computer-room air conditioners, allow space for
service and maintenance.
C. Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Special
Provision 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Provide adequate connections for
condensate drain.
D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in
Provision 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
3.4
Special
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air conditioners.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 238236 - FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision includes hydronic, baseboard and finned-tube radiation heaters.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures.
4. Indicate location and size of each field connection.
5. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.
6. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.
7. Include enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories.
8. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For finned-tube radiation heaters with factoryapplied color finishes.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members, including wall construction, to which finned-tube radiation
heaters will be attached.
2. Method of attaching finned-tube radiation heaters to building structure.
3. Penetrations of fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.
B. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.
3.
4.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
M. Accessories: Filler sections, corners, relay sections, and splice plates all matching the
enclosure and grille finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive finned-tube radiation heaters for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations
before installation of finned-tube radiation heaters.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.
C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.
D. Install access doors for access to valves.
E. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.
F. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are
indicated to extend to adjoining walls.
G. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.
H. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully
recessed unit.
I. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Special Provision 232113 "Hydronic
Piping" and Special Provision 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect hot-water finned-tube radiation heaters and components to piping according
to Special Provision 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Special Provision 232116
Hydronic Piping Specialties."
C. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.
D. Install control valves as required by Special Provision 230900 Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC.
E. Install piping adjacent to finned-tube radiation heaters to allow service and
maintenance.
F. Connect wiring according to Special Provision 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 238236
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coils.
2. Propeller unit heaters with hot-water coils.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. CWP: Cold working pressure.
C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories for each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
C. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
D. Location and size of each field connection.
UNIT HEATERS
886
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UNIT HEATERS
887
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Sterling.
6. Trane.
7. Vulcan.
B. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.
C. Comply with UL 2021.
D. Coil Section Insulation: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be
aluminum-foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
E. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
F. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
H. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color
selected by Engineer.
I. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0677-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam
fasteners.
J. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0677-inch- thick, galvanized,
sheet steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.
K. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.
L. Control Access Door: Key operated.
M. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with
leveling bolts.
N. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch- wide piping end pocket.
O. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet.
UNIT HEATERS
888
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
UNIT HEATERS
889
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations
before unit heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant
materials and applications are specified in Special Provision 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
D. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration
isolators are specified in Special Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
UNIT HEATERS
890
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and spring
hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Special Provision
23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers
are specified in Special Provision 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
F. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights
to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control
sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.
G. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections.
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Drawings indicate
UNIT HEATERS
891
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 23 82 39
UNIT HEATERS
892
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Common electrical installation requirements.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision Section 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling for installation of sleeves for raceways and cables.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that
reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to
other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways, will be clear of obstructions and
of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place
concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind
finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of
firestopping specified in Special Provision 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side
more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches
and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138
inch.
2.2
SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or
conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or
cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each
sealing element.
2.3
GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to
consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool
exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth,
and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,
ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal
raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements in Special Provision 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway
or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal.
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for
electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260500
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.3
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260519
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems
and equipment.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
Person currently certified by the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified
in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise
required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in
diameter.
4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.2
CONNECTORS
Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types,
sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
A. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes:
pressure-type, with at least two bolts.
APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded
conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in
addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners,
heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor
to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing
conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:
Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260526
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum
loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor
of five times the applied force.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical
items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
a. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type
suitable for attached structural element.
b. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
c. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
d. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size
shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel
slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in
future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be
used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication
systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT,
IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as
permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor
and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided
with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4
inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate
concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with
MSS SP-69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt
diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Special Provision
033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5
PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on
miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260529
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and
cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Special Provision Sections include the following:
1. Special Provision 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hingedcover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and
Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for
application and environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type.
G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector
assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints
from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated on
plans:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC and PVC coated rigid steel
conduit, direct buried, as noted on plans.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R and NEMA 4X,
stainless steel as noted on plans.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified
in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Special Provision 260529 "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except
for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:
Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.
Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each
end of pull wire.
K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic
and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50
feet.
2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of
raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull
or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill
them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a
flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent
plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70 for Gasoline Dispensers and Pumps.
M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Special Provision 078413 "ThroughPenetration Firestop Systems."
3.5
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260533
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section Includes:
1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.
2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.
3. Handholes and boxes.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of
events.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components.
2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells,
bends, fittings, and solvent cement.
3. Include accessories for handholes and boxes.
4. Include warning tape.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:
a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and
installation details.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other
utilities.
1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of
expansion fittings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes
and boxes.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
1.8
1.9
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final
arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the
field.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with
final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with
other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that
duct runs drain to handholes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
CONDUIT
A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same
manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.4
1)
Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type
and size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing
indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.
2)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
NewBasis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final
arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the
field. Notify Engineer if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing
structures
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with
final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with
other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and
elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to
handholes, and as approved by Engineer.
3.2
3.3
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
EARTHWORK
A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original
grades unless otherwise indicated.
B. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding,
sodding, sprigging, and mulching.
3.5
DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward handholes and away from
buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two handholes,
to drain in both directions.
B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally
and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do
not lie in same plane.
D. Duct Entrances to Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately
10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.
1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell
without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each
conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to handhole. Install an expansion
fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated
expansion of more than 3/4 inch.
3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight
entrances.
E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel
conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away
from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for
duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in
Special Provision Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
and Cabling."
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled.
Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least
15-psig hydrostatic pressure.
G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf-test nylon cord in empty ducts.
H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank.
2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches wider than duct bank on each side.
3. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 30 inches below finished grade in
deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.
4. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and
outdoor temperature.
5. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and
deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure
separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger
separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together
using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form
conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope
wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and
signal ducts.
7. Elbows: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at
building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless
otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout length of elbow.
8. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and
equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct
run.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,
extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
930
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.6
3.7
GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Special Provision
Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length
of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading
lubricant throughout ducts.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260543
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260544-SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and
floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Special Provision Section 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for
penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal
assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
2. Special Provision Section 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical for
installation of sleeves for raceways and cables.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, plain ends.
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface
with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding
in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center
opening to match piping OD.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. HOLDRITE.
2.4
GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in nonfire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants
of grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches
above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
raceway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway
or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260544
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Identification of power and control cables.
2. Identification for conductors.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Equipment identification labels.
5. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives,
and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading
when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly
found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, OPTICAL
FIBER CABLE.
a. Tag: Type ID:
1) Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented
polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that
allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored,
continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the
utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2) Overall Thickness: 5 mils.
3) Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.
4) Weight: 28 lb./1000 sq. ft..
5) 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.
2.3
2.4
CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties:
locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish
work.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of twocolor markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at
penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at
25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
F. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of
conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished
grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench
exceeds 16 inches overall.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and
junction boxes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below
for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
B. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
C. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1. Phase A: Black.
2. Phase B: Red.
3. Phase C: Blue.
D. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1. Phase A: Brown.
2. Phase B: Orange.
3. Phase C: Yellow.
E. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps
are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape
for power and control wiring.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 260553
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less,
with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.
2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size
of transformer.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
948
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
1. Acme Electric Corporation.
2. Eaton.
3. General Electric Company.
4. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.
5. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
949
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Enclosure: Ventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
compound to seal out moisture and air.
2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary
fans.
D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5
percent taps below normal full capacity.
F. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg. C, UL-component-recognized
insulation system with a maximum of 150-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient
temperature.
G. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width
copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between
input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
H. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
2.3
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution
transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products
are specified in Special Provision 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.4
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
950
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature
requirements for each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required
by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be
installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Special
Provision 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met.
Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.
Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
951
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening
supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall
surface.
B. Construct concrete bases according to Special Provision 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified with concrete.
C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended
torques to reduce noise generation.
E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Special Provision 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Special Provision 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A-486B.
3.4
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
952
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified
above.
D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared
scan of transformer connections.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device
calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and
the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results
of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
scanning observations after remedial action.
E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical
occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at
secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5
percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum
load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap
settings.
3.6
CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
953
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
b.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
954
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
F. SPD: Surge protective device.
G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs,
accessories, and components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
PANELBOARDS
955
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after
load balancing.
PANELBOARDS
956
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Special Provision 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device that allows adjustments.
1.7
3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size
and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed
for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
1.9
PANELBOARDS
957
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PANELBOARDS
959
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately
after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, bakedon finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective
devices and other components.
F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.
b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and
protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main
bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment
grounding conductors; bonded to box.
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance
applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral
bus in gutter.
G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg. C rated conductors without derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if
required, for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each
pole in the panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on
the bar for each pole in the panelboard.
PANELBOARDS
960
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
7. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
H. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service
disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall
have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering.
Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements.
I. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus
connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation
of devices.
J. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with
integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL.
Include label or manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices
listed and labeled by an NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.
1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on
Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2. Panelboards rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit
ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards,
complying with UL 1449 SPD.
2.3
POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
1. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
2. Eaton.
3. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.
PANELBOARDS
961
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Siemens Energy.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker Fused switch Lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and
Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than
125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.4
PANELBOARDS
962
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.5
2.6
IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of
phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards,
and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card
holder.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to
distinguish it from all other circuits.
PANELBOARDS
963
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to
verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required
clearances specified in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged,
rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and
other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install panelboards on cast-in-place steel channel support.
2. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the
panelboard.
PANELBOARDS
964
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
F. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
G. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
H. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient
steel slotted supports vertically.
I. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated
torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived
systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for
isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.
K. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
L. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after
completing load balancing.
M. Mount spare fuse cabinet in accessible location.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install
warning signs complying with requirements in Special Provision 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing.
Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Special Provision 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
PANELBOARDS
965
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Special
Provision 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Special Provision 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4
PANELBOARDS
966
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two
scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. Prior to making
circuit changes to achieve load balancing, inform Architect of effect on phase color
coding.
1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations.
2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility
operation schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services
such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and
receiving equipment.
3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal
facility operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to
achieve load balancing.
4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall
not exceed 20 percent.
3.6
PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to
maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PANELBOARDS
967
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 262416
PANELBOARDS
968
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Special Provision Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
WIRING DEVICES
969
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate
through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain
all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one
source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2
WIRING DEVICES
970
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.3
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is
lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.4
WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded clear lift
cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R
weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.5
FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Brown unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
WIRING DEVICES
971
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall
finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers
that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross
a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded
wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that
show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were
complete.
WIRING DEVICES
972
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until
the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in
length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals.
Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal
screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,
splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to
hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover
rough wall opening.
3.2
WIRING DEVICES
973
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
WIRING DEVICES
974
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
WIRING DEVICES
975
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Enclosures.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
976
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Include plans,
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise
on-site testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from
single source from single manufacturer.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
977
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller:
UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate
indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
978
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.2
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller:
UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept
three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and
aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3
ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250,
and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
979
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install fuses in fusible devices.
C. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Special Provision 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
980
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
981
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
982
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and
less:
1. Full-voltage manual.
2. Full-voltage magnetic.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. MCP: Motor circuit protector.
B. N.C.: Normally closed.
C. N.O.: Normally open.
D. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller
enclosures.
1. Show tabulations of the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Factory-installed devices.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
983
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
c. Nameplate legends.
d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of
OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in
combination controllers.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Special Provision
017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
F. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
984
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.6
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature:
deg. F.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers:
general purpose, Class A.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
985
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Contract No. BB-2829-000-006
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
986
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2. Configuration: Nonreversing.
3. Surface mounting.
C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or pushbutton action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: Nonreversing.
3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10
tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual
protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.
4.
Surface mounting.
D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or pushbutton action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
987
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Controllers:
installed location.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are
wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on
lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide
freestanding racks complying with Special Provision 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
B. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
C. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate fullload amperes after motors have been installed.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring.
Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Special Provision 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
990
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4
3.5
3.6
PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized
and placed into service.
B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
991
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
992
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions,
Special Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A. This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency motor Drive (VFD)
consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use on a standard
NEMA Design B induction motor.
B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary controls as herein
specified. The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of
equipment for a minimum of twenty years. VFDs that are manufactured by a third
party and brand labeled shall not be acceptable.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
a. Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control.
2. Underwriters laboratories
a. UL508C
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
a. ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives
4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2
5. International Building Code 2006
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B. Qualifications:
1. VFDs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFDs that require
the customer to supply external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not
acceptable. VFDs requiring additional branch circuit protection are not
acceptable. The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need for
input fuses.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. ABB ACH Series
b. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems
c. Square D
d. Yaskawa America, Inc.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include the following information:
1. Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weight.
2. Customer connection and power wiring diagrams.
3. Complete technical product description include a complete list of options
provided. Any portions of the specifications not complied with must be clearly
indicated or the supplier and contractor shall be liable to provide all components
required to meet the specification.
4. Compliance to IEEE 519 harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including
total harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion (TDD).
a.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.5
WARRANTY
A. See Section 3.4, Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.
All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and
keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable,
capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of
parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs.
2.
The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control.
There shall be fault reset and Help buttons on the keypad. The Help button
shall include on-line assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
3.
There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a
battery backup with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to
date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault.
If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation
since initial power up. The clock shall also be programmable to control
start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays. The
VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in
the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate,
independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings.
Capacitor backup is not acceptable.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.
The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse)
up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping
or component damage (flying start).
5.
The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating
for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum
FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430-150 for 4pole motors.
6.
The VFD shall have 5% impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the
power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance
may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line
reactors. VFDs with only one DC reactor shall add AC line reactors.
7.
8.
The VFD shall provide a programmable proof of flow form c relay output
(broken belt / broken coupling). The drive shall be programmable to signal this
condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial
communications bus. Relay outputs shall include programmable time delays
that will allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false
underload condition.
Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD
from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.
2.
Two (2) PID Setpoint controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing
pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor
in the VFD for the closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24
VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied
by others. There shall be two parameter sets for the first PID that allow the
sets to be switched via a digital input, serial communications or from the
keypad for night setback, summer/winter setpoints, etc. There shall be an
independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and
modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain setpoint of an independent
process (i.e. valves, dampers, etc.). All setpoints, process variables, etc. to be
accessible from the serial communication network.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.
Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals.
4.
Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may
be programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output
Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage,
Active Reference, and other data.
5.
6.
Three (3) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include
programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays
shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at
250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current
rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true form C type contacts; open collector
outputs are not acceptable.
7.
Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or
valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock
control, or serial communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure
that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the
damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close.
The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows motor
operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When
either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the
damper shall be commanded to close.
8.
Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 1800 seconds
adjustable time ramps.
9.
The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically
reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and
audible motor noise.
10. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier
frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier
frequency without derating the VFD or operating at high carrier frequency
only at low speeds.
11. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
D. The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete
English words for programming and fault diagnostics (LED and alpha-numeric codes
are not acceptable). All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words.
E. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering
(user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be
capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English
words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable):
1.
Output Frequency
2.
3.
Motor Current
4.
Drive Temperature
5.
DC Bus Voltage
6.
Output Voltage
F. The VFD shall include a firemans override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure
from the firemans control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1)
Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed or operate in a specific firemans
override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override
setpoint and feedback . The mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial
communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run
interlock, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. Override
Mode shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the
VFD shall resume normal operation.
G. Serial Communications
1.
The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall
be Modbus, BACnet, Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building
Technologies FLN. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base
VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All
protocols shall be certified by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for
BacNet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.
2.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile
for a B-ASC including, but not limited to:
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop
control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control
adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock
the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor
feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current
(in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours
(resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of
monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input
and analog output values. Pass thru I/O All diagnostic warning and fault
information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote
VFD fault reset shall be possible.
H. EMI / RFI filters. All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The VFD shall comply
standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment, restricted level with up to 100 of
motor cables. No Exceptions. Certified test lab test reports shall be provided with the
submittals
I. All VFDs shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring. The VFD
shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. The VFD shall not be
damaged by this condition.
J. OPTIONAL FEATURES Optional features to be furnished and mounted by the
drive manufacturer. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive
manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. The bypass enclosure
door and VFD enclosure must be interlocked such that input power is turned off
before either enclosure can be opened. The VFD and Bypass as a package shall have
a UL listed short circuit rating of 100,000 amps and shall be indicated on the data
label.
1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output
contactor and bypass contactor, service (isolation) switch and VFD input fuses
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
999
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.
are required. Bypass designs, which have no VFD only fuses, or that
incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted
3. Door interlocked, padlockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power
from the drive and all internally mounted options.
2.2
BYPASS CONTROLLER
A. The following operators shall be provided:
Bypass Hand-Off-Auto
Bypass LDC display, 2 lines, for programming and status / fault / warning
indications
1. Motor protection from single phase power conditions- The Bypass system must
be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass,
disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power
indication. Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in Bypass
mode are not acceptable.
2. The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system
to operate from a line of +30% , -35% nominal voltage as a minimum. The
system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to
remain sealed in over this voltage tolerance at a minimum.
3. The Bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The
bypass shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if
the VFD has been removed from the enclosure for repair / replacement.
4. Serial communications the bypass and VFD shall be capable of being
monitored and / or controlled via serial communications.
Provide
communications protocols for ModBus; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building
Technologies FLN (P1) and BacNet.
5. BACnet Serial communication bypass capabilities shall include, but not be
limited to; bypass run-stop control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the
ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of
allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as, bypass current (in amps), bypass
kilowatt hours (resettable), bypass operating hours (resettable), and bypass logic
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass
relays output status, and all digital input status. Pass thru I/O All bypass
diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial
communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following
additional bypass status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the
serial communications bus keypad Hand or Auto selected, and bypass
selected. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running
under load in both VFD and bypass (proof of flow) in the VFD mode over serial
communications or Form C relay output. A minimum of 40 field parameters
shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.
6. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or
valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock
control, or serial communications) the VFD and bypass shall provide a dry
contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not
operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (endswitch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD system input and
allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided.
When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop,
and the damper shall be commanded to close.
7. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors
and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil.
This failed contactor operation shall be indicated on the Bypass LCD display as
well as over the serial communications protocol.
8. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and
keypad indication that this time delay is in process. This will allow VAV boxes
to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode.
The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 120 seconds.
9. The bypass control shall be programmable for manual or automatic transfer to
bypass. The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive
faults will generate an automatic transfer to bypass and which faults require a
manual transfer to bypass.
10. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and
VFD mode to provide proof of flow indication. The condition shall be indicated
on the keypad display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and on
a relay output contact closure.
11. The bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five
programmable form C relay outputs.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1001
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12. The relay outputs from the bypass shall programmable for any of the following
indications.
a. System started
b. System running
c. Bypass override enabled
d. Drive fault
e. Bypass fault
f. Bypass H-O-A position
g. Motor proof of flow (broken belt)
h. Overload
i. Bypass selected
j. Bypass run
k. System started (damper opening)
l. Bypass alarm
m. Over temperature
13. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass
shall incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external
control power source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC
for use by others to power external devices.
14. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip provide a separate terminal strip for
connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All
external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in
VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and
bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up
to four (4) unique safety inputs.
15. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when the
safety opens. Example text display indications include Firestat, Freezstat,
Over pressure and Low pressure. The user shall also be able to determine
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1002
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications
connection.
16. Class 10, 20, or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be
included.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The contractor
shall install the drive in accordance with the requirements of the VFD manufacturers
installation manual.
3.2
START-UP
A. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory certified
service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy
provided to the owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer.
3.3
PRODUCT SUPPORT
A. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly
familiar with the VFD products offered shall be locally available at both the
specifying and installation locations. A toll free 24/365 technical support line shall be
available.
B. A computer based training CD or 8-hour professionally generated video (VCR
format) shall be provided to the owner at the time of project closeout. The training
shall include installation, programming and operation of the VFD, bypass and serial
communication.
3.4
WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30
months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel
time and expenses.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective
item as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for
all work contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related
Special Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to
complete the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation,
testing, placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional
requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 262923
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
CATEGORY 800
BUILDINGS
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Provisions, Special
Provisions, General Provisions, and Terms and Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Special Provision Section Includes:
1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.
2. Lighting fixture supports.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
C. Sample warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire
manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient
Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure
color consistency among luminaires.
1.8
1.9
WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of
luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DOWNLIGHT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings.
B. Minimum 1,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 90 lumens per watt.
C. Universal mounting bracket.
D. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
2.3
LINEAR INDUSTRIAL
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings.
B. Minimum 5,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 90 lumens per watt.
2.4
RECESSED LINEAR
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings.
B. Minimum 3,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 90 lumens per watt.
C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
2.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SUSPENDED, LINEAR
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings.
B. Minimum 3,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 90 lumens per watt.
2.7
MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate
labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal
viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. LED, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2.8
METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of
adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise
indicated.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum
of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Special Provision Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements
for identification specified in Special Provision Section 26 05 53 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
3.4
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement will be made for work under this section.
4.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. These items will be paid for at the Contract Lump Sum price bid for each respective item
as described herein and shown below. This price shall be full compensation for all work
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
contained in the bid item as described herein and required by the related Special
Provisions.
B. Payment will be made under:
Item 8001 Bay Bridge Administration Buildinglump sum
Item 8002 Bay Bridge Police Buildinglump sum
Item 8003 Temporary Trailerslump sum
C. Costs include all labor, materials, services, testing and equipment necessary to complete
the Work in every respect, including furnishing all materials, installation, testing,
placement into operation, training of Owner personnel, and project closeout.
D. Refer to Section TC-7.05 Progress Payment in TC Section 7 for additional requirements.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISION 26 51 19
PART B-2
ATTACHMENTS
1014
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
1015
_____________________________________________________
Address: ________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Telephone Number: ____________________
Corporate Principal
_____________________________
Date
By:______________________________________
Printed Name: _____________________________
Title:_____________________________________
In presence of Witness:
Co-Partnership Principal
_____________________________
Date
By:______________________________________
Printed Name: _____________________________
Title:_____________________________________
In presence of Witness:
Individual Principal/Owner
_____________________________
Date
By:______________________________________
Printed Name: _____________________________
Title:_____________________________________
1017
___________________________________
Name
___________________________________
Street and/or P.O. Box
___________________________________
City/State/Zip Code
_____________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
___________________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
BY: _____________________________
Signature
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
IF A BIDDER IS A JOINT VENTURE (JV), an officer from each JV member having the contractual
authority to bind the proposed resources from its firm shall sign. Affix corporate seals, as applicable.
IF A BIDDER IS A CORPORATION, in addition to authorized signing officer signature(s), affix the
corporate seal.
IF A BIDDER IS A PARTNERSHIP, a member of the firm fully authorized to bind the firm shall sign.
IF A BIDDER IS A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP, the owner of the proprietorship or its fully authorized
representative shall sign.
In the event anyone other than those designated above signs, a Corporate Resolution must be provided with
the Bid, demonstrating that the signee has legal authority to bind the firm.
1018
NOTE: This proposal shall be filled in by the bidder, with the prices written in words and numerals. The extension amounts of unit costs
shall also be filled in. For complete information concerning these items, see Specifications, Special Provisions and Contract Form.
BIDDERS NAME:___________________________________________________________________________________________
ITEM
NOS.
APPROXIMATE
QUANTITIES
1001
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
PER LUMP SUM
ENGINEERS OFFICE, TYPE B
1002
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
PER LUMP SUM
CPM TYPE A
1003
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
PER LUMP SUM
1019
UNIT PRICE
DOLLARS CTS.
AMOUNTS
DOLLARS
CTS.
NOTE: This proposal shall be filled in by the bidder, with the prices written in words and numerals. The extension amounts of unit costs
shall also be filled in. For complete information concerning these items, see Specifications, Special Provisions and Contract Form.
BIDDERS NAME:___________________________________________________________________________________________
ITEM
NOS.
APPROXIMATE
QUANTITIES
UNIT PRICE
DOLLARS CTS.
AMOUNTS
DOLLARS
CTS.
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
LUMP SUM
BAY BRIDGE POLICE BUILDING
8002
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
LUMP SUM
TEMPORARY TRAILERS
8003
LUMP SUM
AT ________________________________________
LUMP SUM
MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION (ALLOWANCE)
8004
ALLOWANCE
$450,000
AT FOUR-HUNDRED FIFTY-THOUSAND DOLLARS NO CENTS
LUMP SUM
1020
00
NOTE: This proposal shall be filled in by the bidder, with the prices written in words and numerals. The extension amounts of unit costs
shall also be filled in. For complete information concerning these items, see Specifications, Special Provisions and Contract Form.
BIDDERS NAME:___________________________________________________________________________________________
ITEM
NOS.
APPROXIMATE
QUANTITIES
AT ________________________________________
AT ________________________________________
AT ________________________________________
1021
UNIT PRICE
DOLLARS CTS.
AMOUNTS
DOLLARS
CTS.
General
a.
b.
c.
II.
Corporation
Co-Partnership
(Check One)
Individual
Experience
a.
b.
Name
c.
Years
Experience
Type of Work
Highway, Etc.
In What Capacity
Foreman, Etc.
1022
d.
Description
General or Sub
(If Sub, what
Type of Work)
Your Contract
Amount
1023
Year
Contract
Name/Number
Have you ever performed work for the U.S Government? ________; any State
Government ? __________ (List State); any County or City Government?________
(List). If yes to any of above please list references.
f.
g. Has any officer or partner of your organization ever been an officer or partner of
some other organization that failed to complete a construction contract? ______ If
so, state name of individual, other organization and reason therefore.
h. Has any officer or partner of your organization ever failed to complete a construction
contract handled in his own name? ________________________________________
If so, state name of individual, name of Owner and reason therefore.
1024
If so,
IV.
Total Cost of
Project
Amount of Work
Completed
Amount to
be
Completed
Probable Date of
Completion
Bidder Certification
The above statements are certified to be true and accurate and we have the equipment, labor,
supervision and financial capacity to perform this contract, either with our organization or with
subcontractors, as provided in Section GP-8.01.
Dated at _____________________ this _________________ day of___________ 20_______
By ________________________________
___________________________________
Title of Person Signing
___________________________________
Name of Organization
State of ______________________
County of ____________________
___________________________________________ being duly sworn states that he is
____________________________ of __________________________ and that the answers to the
foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true an
Sworn to before me this _________________ day of ________________ 20_______
________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission expires: _________________
1025
PART C
1026
ATTACHMENTS
1027
B)
In a Substantial Labor Surplus Area, Buy American Steel if the total cost of
Domestic Steel (D) is less than the amount of a thirty percent (30%) increase to the total cost of
Foreign Steel (F).
total cost (D)
1.3 x total cost (F)
1028
Costs: Furnishing
Erection/Placement
Inspection Cost
Duties
Transportation
Other Costs
Total Item Cost
Structural Steel Items
Category Item No.
Domestic (D)
Foreign (F)
Description
Costs: Furnishing
Erection/Placement
Inspection Cost
Duties
Transportation
Other Costs
___
___
Domestic (D)
Description
Costs: Furnishing
Erection/Placement
Inspection Cost
Duties
Transportation
Other Costs
Total Item Cost
1029
Foreign (F)
Domestic (D)
Foreign (F)
Description
Costs: Furnishing
Erection/Placement
Inspection Cost
Duties
Transportation
Other Costs
Total Cost of All Steel Items D)
F) ________
I hereby certify that the bid or offered price of domestic steel products similar to those listed
above is unreasonable pursuant to COMAR 21.11.02.
__________________________
Date
______________________________
Signature
Title
1030
PAGE 1 OF 2
THIS
I have met the overall certified Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) participation
goal of
percent (
%) and the following subgoals, if applicable:
percent (
%) for African American-owned MBE firms
percent (
%) for Hispanic American-owned MBE firms
percent (
%) for Asian American-owned MBE firms
percent (
%) for Women-owned MBE firms
I agree that these percentages of the total dollar amount of the Contract, for the MBE goal and subgoals (if any), will be
performed by certified MBE firms as set forth in the MBE Participation Schedule - Part 2 of the MDOT MBE Form B
(State-Funded Contracts).
OR
I conclude that I am unable to achieve the MBE participation goal and/or subgoals. I hereby request a waiver, in
whole or in part, of the overall goal and/or subgoals. Within 10 business days of receiving notice that our firm is the
apparent awardee or as requested by the Procurement Officer, I will submit a written waiver request and all required
documentation in accordance with COMAR 21.11.03.11. For a partial waiver request, I agree that certified MBE firms
will be used to accomplish the percentages of the total dollar amount of the Contract, for the MBE goal and subgoals (if
any), as set forth in the MBE Participation Schedule - Part 2 of the MDOT MBE Form B (State-Funded Contracts).
2.
I understand that if I am notified that I am the apparent awardee or as requested by the Procurement Officer, I must
submit the following documentation within 10 business days of receiving such notice:
(a) Outreach Efforts Compliance Statement (MDOT MBE Form C - State-Funded Contracts);
(b) Subcontractor Project Participation Statement (MDOT MBE Form D - State-Funded Contracts);
(c) If waiver requested, MBE Waiver Request Documentation and Forms (MDOT MBE/DBE Form E Good Faith Efforts
Guidance and Documentation) per COMAR 21.11.03.11; and
(d) Any other documentation required by the Procurement Officer to ascertain bidders responsibility/ offerors
susceptibility of being selected for award in connection with the certified MBE participation goal and subgoals, if any.
I acknowledge that if I fail to return each completed document (in 2 (a) through (d)) within the required time, the
Procurement Officer may determine that I am not responsible and therefore not eligible for contract award or that the
proposal is not susceptible of being selected for award.
MDOT-OP 012-2 (9/11) (Revised 7/14)
1031
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PAGE 2 OF 2
_________________________
Company Name
________________________
Signature of Representative
_________________________
Address
________________________
Printed Name and Title
_________________________
City, State and Zip Code
________________________
Date
1032
Please refer to the Maryland Department of Transportation (MDOT) MBE Directory at www.mdot.state.md.us to determine if a
firm is certified for the appropriate North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) Code and the product/services
description (specific product that a firm is certified to provide or specific areas of work that a firm is certified to perform). For
more general information about NAICS, please visit www.naics.com. Only those specific products and/or services for which a
prime or subcontractor is a certified MBE in the MDOT Directory can be used for purposes of achieving the MBE participation
goals.
2.
In order to be counted for purposes of achieving the MBE participation goals, the MBE firm (whether a prime or subcontractor)
must be certified for that specific NAICS Code (MBE for State-funded projects designation after NAICS Code). WARNING: If
the firms NAICS Code is in graduated status, such services/products will not be counted for purposes of achieving the MBE
participation goals. Graduated status is clearly identified in the MDOT Directory (such graduated codes are designated with the
word graduated after the appropriate NAICS Code).
3.
Examining the NAICS Code is the first step in determining whether an MBE firm is certified and eligible to receive MBE
participation credit for the specific products/services to be supplied or performed under the contract. The second step is to
determine whether a firms Products/Services Description in the MBE Directory includes the products to be supplied and/or
services to be performed that are being used to achieve the MBE participation goals. If you have any questions as to whether a
firm is certified to perform the specific services or provide specific products, please contact MDOTs Office of Minority Business
Enterprise at 1-800-544-6056 or via email at mbe@mdot.state.md.us.
4.
Complete the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule for all certified MBE firms (including primes and subcontractors) being used
to achieve the MBE participation goal and subgoals, if any.
5.
MBE Prime Self-Performance. When a certified MBE firm participates as a prime (independently or as part of a joint venture)
on a contract, a procurement agency may count the distinct, clearly defined portion of the work of the contract that the certified
MBE firm performs with its own forces toward fulfilling up to fifty-percent (50%) of the MBE participation goal (overall) and up to
one hundred percent (100%) of not more than one of the MBE participation subgoals, if any, established for the contract. In
order to receive credit for self-performance, an MBE prime must be (a) a certified MBE (see 1-3 above) and (b) listed in the Part
2 MBE Participation Schedule with its certification number, the certification classification under which it will self-perform, and
the percentage of the contract that can be counted as MBE self-performance. For the remaining portion of the overall goal and
any subgoals, the MBE prime must also list, in the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule, other certified MBE firms used to meet
those goals or, after making good faith efforts to obtain the participation of additional MBE firms, request a waiver. Note: A
dually-certified MBE firm can use its own forces toward fulfilling ONLY ONE of the MBE subgoals for which it can be counted.
6.
The Contractors subcontractors are considered second-tier subcontractors. Third-tier contracting used to meet an MBE goal is
to be considered the exception and not the rule. The following two conditions must be met before MDOT, its Modal
Administrations and the Maryland Transportation Authority may approve a third-tier contracting agreement: (a) the
bidder/offeror must request in writing approval of each third-tier contract arrangement, and (b) the request must contain
specifics as to why a third-tier contracting arrangement should be approved. These documents must be submitted with the
bid/proposal in Part 2 of this MBE Participation Schedule.
MDOT-OP 013-2 (7/14)
1033
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PART 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
PAGE 2 OF 3
7.
For each MBE firm that is being used as a supplier/wholesaler/regular dealer/broker/manufacturer, please follow these
instructions for calculating the amount of the subcontract for purposes of achieving the MBE participation goals:
A.
Is the firm certified as a broker of the products/supplies? If the answer is YES, please continue to Item C. If the answer
is NO, please continue to Item B.
B.
Is the firm certified as a supplier, wholesaler, regular dealer, or manufacturer of such products/supplies? If the answer is
YES, continue to Item D. If the answer is NO, continue to Item C only if the MBE firm is certified to perform
trucking/hauling services under NAICS Codes 484110, 484121, 484122, 484210, 484220 and 484230. If the answer is
NO and the firm is not certified under these NAICS Codes, then no MBE participation credit will be given for the supply of
these products.
C.
For purposes of achieving the MBE participation goal, you may count only the amount of any reasonable fee that the
MBE firm will receive for the provision of such products/supplies - not the total subcontract amount or the value (or a
percentage thereof) of such products and/or supplies. For Column 3 of the MBE Participation Schedule, please divide
the amount of any reasonable fee that the MBE firm will receive for the provision of such products/services by the total
Contract value and insert the percentage in Line 3.1.
D.
Is the firm certified as a manufacturer (refer to the firms NAICS Code and specific description of products/services) of
the products/supplies to be provided? If the answer is NO, please continue to Item E. If the answer is YES, for purposes
of achieving the MBE participation goal, you may count the total amount of the subcontract. For Column 3 of the MBE
Participation Schedule, please divide the total amount of the subcontract by the total Contract value and insert the
percentage in Line 3.1.
E.
8.
Is the firm certified as a supplier, wholesaler and/or regular dealer? If the answer is YES and the MBE firm is
furnishing and installing the materials and is certified to perform these services, please divide the total subcontract
amount (including full value of supplies) by the total Contract value and insert the percentage in Line 3.1. If the answer is
YES and the MBE firm is only being used as a supplier, wholesaler and/or regular dealer or is not certified to install the
supplies/materials, for purposes of achieving the MBE participation goal, you may only count sixty percent (60%) of the
value of the subcontract for these supplies/products (60% Rule). To apply the 60% Rule, first divide the amount of the
subcontract for these supplies/products only (not installation) by the total Contract value. Then, multiply the result by
sixty percent (60%) and insert the percentage in Line 3.2.
For each MBE firm that is not being used as a supplier/wholesaler/regular dealer/broker/manufacturer, to calculate the amount
of the subcontract for purposes of achieving the MBE participation goals, divide the total amount of the subcontract by
the total Contract value and insert the percentage in Line 3.1.
Example:
9.
$ 2,500 (Total Subcontract Amount) $10,000 (Total Contract Value) x 100 = 25%
WARNING: The percentage of MBE participation, computed using the percentage amounts determined per Column 3 for all of
the MBE firms listed in Part 2, MUST at least equal the MBE participation goal and subgoals (if applicable) as set forth in
MDOT MBE Form A State-Funded Contracts for this solicitation. If a bidder/offeror is unable to achieve the MBE participation
goal and/or any subgoals (if applicable), then the bidder/offeror must request a waiver in Form A or the bid will be deemed not
responsive, or the proposal not susceptible of being selected for award. You may wish to use the attached Goal/Subgoal
Worksheet to assist you in calculating the percentages and confirming that you have met the applicable MBE participation goal
and subgoals (if any).
MDOT-OP 013-2 (7/14)
1034
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PART 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
PAGE 3 OF 3
GOAL/SUBGOAL PARTICIPATION WORKSHEET
1.
Complete the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule for each MBE being used to meet the MBE goal and any subgoals.
2.
After completion of the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule, you may use the Goal/Subgoal Worksheet to calculate the total
MBE participation commitment for the overall goal and any subgoals.
3.
MBE Overall Goal Participation Boxes: Calculate the total percentage of MBE participation for each MBE classification by
adding the percentages determined per Column 3 of the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule. Add the percentages
determined in Lines 3.1 and 3.2 for the MBE subcontractor (subs) total. Add the overall participation percentages determined in
Line 3.3 for the MBE prime total.
4.
MBE Subgoal Participation Boxes: Calculate the total percentage of MBE participation for each MBE classification by adding
the percentages determined per Column 3 of the Part 2 MBE Participation Schedule. Add the percentages determined in
Lines 3.1 and 3.2 for the MBE subcontractor (subs) total. Add the subgoal participation percentages determined in Line 3.3 for
the MBE prime total.
5.
The percentage amount for the MBE overall participation in the Total MBE Firm Participation Box F1 should be equal to the
sum of the percentage amounts in Boxes A through E of the MBE Overall Goal Participation Column of the Worksheet.
6.
The percentage amount for the MBE subgoal participation in the Total MBE Firm Participation Box L should be equal to the sum
of the percentage amounts in Boxes A through E of the MBE Subgoal Participation Column of the Worksheet.
GOAL/SUBGOAL WORKSHEET
MBE Overall Goal
Participation
MBE Classification
MBE Subgoal
Participation
_________%subs
_________%subs
_________%prime
_________%prime
_________%subs
_________%subs
_________%prime
_________%prime
_________%subs
_________%subs
_________%prime
_________%prime
_________%subs
_________%subs
_________%prime
_________%prime
_________%subs
_________%subs
_________%prime
_________%prime
(F1)__________%
(F2)__________%
1035
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PART 2 MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
PAGE __ OF ___
PARTS 2 AND 3 MUST BE INCLUDED WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL. IF THE BIDDER/OFFEROR FAILS TO
ACCURATELY COMPLETE AND SUBMIT PART 2 WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL AS REQUIRED, THE BID
SHALL BE DEEMED NOT RESPONSIVE OR THE PROPOSAL SHALL BE DEEMED NOT SUSCEPTIBLE OF
BEING SELECTED FOR AWARD.
PAGE __ OF ___
Prime Contractor
Project Description
Solicitation Number
LIST INFORMATION FOR EACH CERTIFIED MBE PRIME OR MBE SUBCONTRACTOR YOU AGREE TO USE TO ACHIEVE THE MBE
PARTICIPATION GOAL AND SUBGOALS, IF ANY. NOTE INSTRUCTIONS IN EACH COLUMN.
COLUMN 1
COLUMN 2
1.
2.
MBE Name:
Certification Number:
1036
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PART 2 MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
CONTINUATION SHEET
PAGE __ OF ___
Prime Contractor
Project Description
Solicitation Number
LIST INFORMATION FOR EACH CERTIFIED MBE PRIME OR MBE SUBCONTRACTOR YOU AGREE TO USE TO ACHIEVE THE
MBE PARTICIPATION GOAL AND SUBGOALS, IF ANY. NOTE INSTRUCTIONS IN EACH COLUMN.
COLUMN 1
COLUMN 2
MBE Name:
Certification Number:
1.
2.
1037
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
PART 3 CERTIFICATION FOR MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
PARTS 2 AND 3 MUST BE INCLUDED WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL
AS DIRECTED IN THE INVITATION TO BID/ REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS.
I hereby affirm that I have reviewed the Products and Services Description (specific product that a firm is certified to
provide or areas of work that a firm is certified to perform) set forth in the MDOT MBE Directory for each of the MBE
firms listed in Part 2 of this MBE Form B for purposes of achieving the MBE participation goals and subgoals that were
identified in the MBE Form A that I submitted with this solicitation, and that the MBE firms listed are only performing
those products/services/areas of work for which they are certified. I also hereby affirm that I have read and understand
the form instructions set forth in Part 1 of this MBE Form B.
The undersigned Prime Contractor hereby certifies and agrees that they have fully complied with the State Minority
Business Enterprise law, State Finance and Procurement Article 14-308(a)(2), Annotated Code of Maryland which
provides that, except as otherwise provided by law, a contractor may not identify a certified minority business
enterprise in a bid or proposal and:
(1) fail to request, receive, or otherwise obtain authorization from the certified minority business enterprise to
identify the certified minority business enterprise in its bid or proposal;
(2) fail to notify the certified minority business enterprise before execution of the contract of its inclusion of the bid
or proposal;
(3) fail to use the certified minority business enterprise in the performance of the contract; or
(4) pay the certified minority business enterprise solely for the use of its name in the bid or proposal.
I solemnly affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of Parts 2 and 3 of MDOT MBE Form B are true to the
best of my knowledge, information and belief.
_________________________________
____________________________________
Company Name
Signature of Representative
_________________________________
____________________________________
Address
_________________________________
____________________________________
Date
1038
STATE-FUNDED CONTRACTS
OUTREACH EFFORTS COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
In conjunction with the offer/proposal submitted in response to Solicitation No.___________, I state the following:
1. Bidder/Offeror took the following efforts to identify subcontracting opportunities in these specific work categories:
2. Attached to this form are copies of written solicitations (with bidding/proposal instructions) used to solicit certified
MBE firms for these subcontract opportunities.
3. Bidder/Offeror made the following attempts to personally contact the solicited MBE firms:
_________________________
Company Name
________________________
Signature of Representative
_________________________
Address
________________________
Printed Name and Title
_________________________
City, State and Zip Code
________________________
Date
MDOT-OP 014-2 (9/11)
1039
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
IF THE BIDDER/OFFEROR FAILS TO RETURN THIS AFFIDAVIT WITHIN THE REQUIRED TIME, THE PROCUREMENT
OFFICER MAY DETERMINE THAT THE BIDDER/OFFEROR IS NOT RESPONSIBLE AND THEREFORE NOT ELIGIBLE FOR
CONTRACT AWARD OR THAT THE PROPOSAL IS NOT SUSCEPTIBLE OF BEING SELECTED FOR AWARD. SUBMIT ONE
FORM FOR EACH CERTIFIED MBE FIRM LISTED IN THE MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE. BIDDERS/OFFERORS ARE
HIGHLY ENCOURAGED TO SUBMIT FORM D PRIOR TO THE TEN (10) DAY DEADLINE.
Provided that _________________________________________________ (Prime Contractors Name) is awarded the State
contract in conjunction with Solicitation No. _______________________, such Prime Contractor will enter into a subcontract with
____________________(Subcontractors Name) committing to participation by the MBE firm ___________________ (MBE
Name) with MDOT Certification Number _______________ (if subcontractor previously listed is also the MBE firm, please
restate name and provide MBE Certification Number) which will receive at least $___________ or ___% (Total Subcontract
Amount/ Percentage) for performing the following products/services for the Contract:
NAICS CODE
I solemnly affirm under the penalties of perjury that the information provided in this MBE Subcontractor Project
Participation Affidavit is true to the best of my knowledge, information and belief. I acknowledge that, for purposes of
determining the accuracy of the information provided herein, the Procurement Officer may request additional
information, including, without limitation, copies of the subcontract agreements and quotes.
PRIME CONTRACTOR
Signature of Representative:
__________________________________
Printed Name and
Title:________________
___________________________________
Firms Name: _______________________
Federal Identification Number:
__________
Address: ___________________________
___________________________________
Telephone: _________________________
Date: _____________________________
SUBCONTRACTOR (SECONDTIER)
SUBCONTRACTOR (THIRDTIER)
Signature of Representative:
___________________________________
Printed Name and
Title:________________
___________________________________
Firms Name:
________________________
Federal Identification Number:
__________
Address: ___________________________
___________________________________
Telephone: _________________________
Date: ______________________________
Signature of Representative:
___________________________________
Printed Name and
Title:________________
___________________________________
Firms Name:
________________________
Federal Identification Number:
__________
Address: ___________________________
___________________________________
Telephone: _________________________
Date: ______________________________
IF MBE FIRM IS A THIRD-TIER SUBCONTRACTOR, THIS FORM MUST ALSO BE EXECUTED BY THE
SECOND-TIER SUBCONTRACTOR THAT HAS THE SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT WITH THE MBE FIRM.
MDOT-OP 015-2 (9/11)
1040
Definitions
MBE/DBE Goal(s) MBE/DBE Goal(s) refers to the MBE participation goal and MBE participation subgoal(s) on a
State-funded procurement and the DBE participation goal on a federally-funded procurement.
Good Faith Efforts The Good Faith Efforts requirement means that when requesting a waiver, the bidder/offeror
must demonstrate that it took all necessary and reasonable steps to achieve the MBE/DBE Goal(s), which, by their
scope, intensity, and appropriateness to the objective, could reasonably be expected to obtain sufficient MBE/DBE
participation, even if those steps were not fully successful. Whether a bidder/offeror that requests a waiver made
adequate good faith efforts will be determined by considering the quality, quantity, and intensity of the different kinds of
efforts that the bidder/offeror has made. The efforts employed by the bidder/offeror should be those that one could
reasonably expect a bidder/offeror to take if the bidder/offeror were actively and aggressively trying to obtain DBE
participation sufficient to meet the DBE contract goal. Mere pro forma efforts are not good faith efforts to meet the DBE
contract requirements. The determination concerning the sufficiency of the bidder's/offerors good faith efforts is a
judgment call; meeting quantitative formulas is not required.
Identified Firms Identified Firms means a list of the DBEs identified by the procuring agency during the goal setting
process and listed in the federally-funded procurement as available to perform the Identified Items of Work. It also may
include additional DBEs identified by the bidder/offeror as available to perform the Identified Items of Work, such as
DBEs certified or granted an expansion of services after the procurement was issued. If the procurement does not
include a list of Identified Firms or is a State-funded procurement, this term refers to all of the MBE Firms (if Statefunded) or DBE Firms (if federally-funded) the bidder/offeror identified as available to perform the Identified Items of
Work and should include all appropriately certified firms that are reasonably identifiable.
Identified Items of Work Identified Items of Work means the bid items identified by the procuring agency during
the goal setting process and listed in the procurement as possible items of work for performance by MBE/DBE Firms.
It also may include additional portions of items of work the bidder/offeror identified for performance by MBE/DBE Firms
to increase the likelihood that the MBE/DBE Goal(s) will be achieved. If the procurement does not include a list of
Identified Items of Work, this term refers to all of the items of work the bidder/offeror identified as possible items of
work for performance by MBE/DBE Firms and should include all reasonably identifiable work opportunities.
MBE/DBE Firms For State-funded contracts, MBE/DBE Firms refers to certified MBE Firms. Certified MBE Firms
can participate in the States MBE Program. For federally-funded contracts, MBE/DBE Firms refers to certified DBE
Firms. Certified DBE Firms can participate in the federal DBE Program.
1041
1045
1046
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Project Description
Solicitation Number
PARTS 3, 4, AND 5 MUST BE INCLUDED WITH THIS CERTIFICATE ALONG WITH ALL DOCUMENTS SUPPORTING YOUR WAIVER
REQUEST.
I hereby request a waiver of (1) the Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) participation goal and/or subgoal(s),
(2) the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) participation goal, or (3) a portion of the pertinent
MBE/DBE participation goal and/or MBE subgoal(s) for this procurement.1 I affirm that I have reviewed the
Good Faith Efforts Guidance MBE/DBE Form E. I further affirm under penalties of perjury that the contents
of Parts 3, 4, and 5 of MDOT MBE/DBE Form E are true to the best of my knowledge, information and
belief.
____________________________________
_______________________________________
Company Name
Signature of Representative
____________________________________
_______________________________________
Address
____________________________________
_______________________________________
Date
1 MBE participation goals and subgoals apply to State-funded procurements. DBE participation goals apply to federally-funded
procurements. Federally-funded contracts do not have subgoals.
1047
Project Description
Solicitation Number
Identify those items of work that the bidder/offeror made available to MBE/DBE Firms. This includes, where
appropriate, those items the bidder/offeror identified and determined to subdivide into economically feasible units to
facilitate the MBE/DBE participation. For each item listed, show the anticipated percentage of the total contract
amount. It is the bidders/offerors responsibility to demonstrate that sufficient work to meet the goal was made
available to MBE/DBE Firms, and the total percentage of the items of work identified for MBE/DBE participation equals
or exceeds the percentage MBE/DBE goal set for the procurement. Note: If the procurement includes a list of bid
items identified during the goal setting process as possible items of work for performance by MBE/DBE Firms, the
bidder/offeror should make all of those items of work available to MBE/DBE Firms or explain why that item was not
made available. If the bidder/offeror selects additional items of work to make available to MBE/DBE Firms, those
additional items should also be included below.
Does
bidder/offeror
normally
self-perform
this work?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
1048
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Project Description
Solicitation Number
Identify the MBE/DBE Firms solicited to provide quotes for the Identified Items of Work made available for MBE/DBE participation.
Include the name of the MBE/DBE Firm solicited, items of work for which bids/quotes were solicited, date and manner of initial and
follow-up solicitations, whether the MBE/DBE provided a quote, and whether the MBE/DBE is being used to meet the MBE/DBE
participation goal. MBE/DBE Firms used to meet the participation goal must be included on the MBE/DBE Participation Schedule,
Form B. Note: If the procurement includes a list of the MBE/DBE Firms identified during the goal setting process as potentially
available to perform the items of work, the bidder/offeror should solicit all of those MBE/DBE Firms or explain why a specific
MBE/DBE was not solicited. If the bidder/offeror identifies additional MBE/DBE Firms who may be available to perform Identified
Items of Work, those additional MBE/DBE Firms should also be included below. Copies of all written solicitations and
documentation of follow-up calls to MBE/DBE Firms must be attached to this form. If the bidder/offeror used a Non-MBE/DBE or is
self-performing the identified items of work, Part 4 must be completed.
Name of
Describe Item of Work
Initial
Follow-up
Details for
Quote Quote Reason
Identified MBE/DBE Firm Solicited
Solicitation
Solicitation
Follow-up Calls
Recd
Used
Quote Rejected
& MBE Classification
Date & Method
Date & Method
Firm Name:
Date:
Date:
Time of Call:
Yes
Yes
Used Other
No
No
MBE/DBE
Used Non Mail
Phone
Spoke With:
MBE Classification
MBE/DBE
Facsimile
Mail
(Check only if
Email
Facsimile
Left Message
requesting waiver of
Self-performing
Email
MBE subgoal.)
African AmericanOwned
Hispanic AmericanOwned
Asian AmericanOwned
Women-Owned
Other MBE
Classification
___________________
_
Firm Name:
MBE Classification
(Check only if
requesting waiver of
MBE subgoal.)
Date:
Date:
Time of Call:
Mail
Facsimile
Email
Phone
Mail
Facsimile
Email
Spoke With:
African AmericanOwned
Hispanic AmericanOwned
Asian AmericanOwned
Women-Owned
Other MBE
Classification
___________________
_
1049
Left Message
Yes
No
Yes
No
Used Other
MBE/DBE
Used NonMBE/DBE
Self-performing
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Project Description
Solicitation Number
This form must be completed if Part 3 indicates that a MBE/DBE quote was rejected because the bidder/offeror is
using a Non-MBE/DBE or is self-performing the Identified Items of Work. Provide the Identified Items Work, indicate
whether the work will be self-performed or performed by a Non-MBE/DBE, and if applicable, state the name of the
Non-MBE/DBE. Also include the names of all MBE/DBE and Non-MBE/DBE Firms that provided a quote and the
amount of each quote.
Describe Identified
Items of Work Not Being
Performed by MBE/DBE
(Include spec/section
number from bid)
Self-performing or Using
Non-MBE/DBE (Provide
name)
Self-performing
Using Non-MBE/DBE
________________
Self-performing
Using Non-MBE/DBE
________________
Self-performing
Using Non-MBE/DBE
________________
Self-performing
Using Non- MBE/DBE
________________
Self-performing
Using Non- MBE/DBE
________________
Self-performing
Using Non- MBE/DBE
Amount of
NonMBE/DBE
Quote
$_________
$_________
$_________
$_________
$_________
$_________
________________
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non-MBE/DBE
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non- MBE/DBE
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non- MBE/DBE
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non- MBE/DBE
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non- MBE/DBE
__________________
MBE/DBE
Non- MBE/DBE
1050
Amount
Quoted
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
$__________
Price
Capabilities
Other
A. Each solicitation shall provide notice that the affidavit in B of this regulation shall be completed
and submitted to the procurement agency with the vendor's bid or offer.
B. Mandatory Solicitation Addendum. The solicitation addendum shall be in substantially the same
form as follows:
BID/PROPOSAL AFFIDAVIT
A. Authority
I HEREBY AFFIRM THAT:
I (print name)_____________________ possess the legal authority to make this Affidavit.
B. CERTIFICATION REGARDING COMMERCIAL NONDISCRIMINATION
The undersigned bidder hereby certifies and agrees that the following information is correct: In
preparing its bid on this project, the bidder has considered all proposals submitted from qualified,
potential subcontractors and suppliers, and has not engaged in "discrimination" as defined in 19103 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland.
"Discrimination" means any disadvantage, difference, distinction, or preference in the solicitation,
selection, hiring, or commercial treatment of a vendor, subcontractor, or commercial customer on
the basis of race, color, religion, ancestry, or national origin, sex, age, marital status, sexual
orientation, or on the basis of disability or any otherwise unlawful use of characteristics regarding
the vendor's, supplier's, or commercial customer's employees or owners. "Discrimination" also
includes retaliating against any person or other entity for reporting any incident of "discrimination".
Without limiting any other provision of the solicitation on this project, it is understood that, if the
certification is false, such false certification constitutes grounds for the State to reject the bid
submitted by the bidder on this project, and terminate any contract awarded based on the bid. As
part of its bid or proposal, the bidder herewith submits a list of all instances within the past 4 years
where there has been a final adjudicated determination in a legal or administrative proceeding in the
State of Maryland that the bidder discriminated against subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, or
commercial customers, and a description of the status or resolution of that determination, including
any remedial action taken. Bidder agrees to comply in all respects with the State's Commercial
Nondiscrimination Policy as described under Title 19 of the State Finance and Procurement Article
of the Annotated Code of Maryland.
1051
1055
Rev. 4/3/2015
1058
_____________________________________________________________________; and
WHEREAS, as security for said bid the Principal has elected to provide a bank certified
check, bank cashiers check, or bank treasurers check in the sum stated above; and
WHEREAS, said bank certified check, bank cashiers check, or bank treasurers check is
attached hereto and incorporated herein in the sum stated above as security for this bid guaranty.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal, upon acceptance by the State of its bid identified
above, within the period specified for acceptance (ninety (90) days if no period is specified) fails to
execute such further contractual documents and give such payment and performance guarantees as
may be required by the terms of the bid within the time specified (ten (10) days if no period is
specified), then the State may recover from the security provided for this bid guaranty any cost of
procuring the work which exceeds the amount of the Principals bid, to the limits of the sum stated
above.
1059
In Presence Of:
Individual Principal
Witness
______________________________ as to __________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
FOR PARTNERSHIPS
In Presence Of:
Co-Partnership Principal
Witness
_________________________________________
(Name of Co-Partnership)
____________________________
By:
_________________________________
____________________________
as to
__________________________________
____________________________ as to ___________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
SP 800
FOR CORPORATIONS
Corporate Principal
Attest:
_____________________________________
(Name of Corporation)
AFFIX
________________ CORPORATE
President
SEAL
_____________________________________________________________________
____________________________
By
1060
___________________________________
Name
_____________________________
Street and/or P.O. Box
___________________________________
Street and/or P.O. Box
_____________________________
City/State/Zip Code
___________________________________
City/State/Zip Code
_____________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
___________________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
BY: _____________________________
Signature
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
BY: _____________________________
Signature
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
1061
1062
Individual Principal
__________________________________
(Name)
_____________________________ as to
________________________________ (SEAL)
FOR PARTNERSHIPS
In Presence of:
Witness
Partnership Principal
__________________________________
(Name)
_____________________________ as to
________________________________ (SEAL)
Partner
_____________________________ as to
________________________________ (SEAL)
Partner
_____________________________ as to
________________________________ (SEAL)
Partner
FOR CORPORATIONS
Attest:
Corporate Principal
__________________________________
(Name of Corporation)
_____________________________
By: ______________________________
Secretary
President
1063
AFFIX
SEAL
___________________________________
Name
_____________________________
Street and/or P.O. Box
___________________________________
Street and/or P.O. Box
_____________________________
City/State/Zip Code
___________________________________
City/State/Zip Code
_____________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
___________________________________
Fed. ID or SSN
BY: _____________________________
Signature
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
BY: _____________________________
Signature
WITNESS _________________________
Date
TITLE: __________________________
Signature
(SEAL) ____________________________
Secretarys Signature
1064
__________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Attest:
______________________________
AFFIX
1065
To the Authority for any claim it may have against the Contractor under this
2.
Unless waived by the Board of Public Works, to the Comptroller for any claim over
$50 against the Contractor by the State, a unit, or a state-controlled governmental entity; and
3.
To the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be liable to the Escrow Agent for the payment of fees and
charges in connection with the establishment and maintenance of the Escrow Account.
CHECK ONE:
_______
_______
Contractor DOES NOT elect to utilize an Escrow Account for Retained Funds
Contractor:
_____________________
By: _________________________
Date:
_____________________
Title: ________________________
1066
Attend
No
Site
[INSERT
DATE]
[INSERT
TIME]
1067
AUTHORITY
domestic or foreign;
domestic or foreign;
domestic or foreign;
domestic or foreign;
and is registered or qualified as required under Maryland Law. I further affirm that the above
business is in good standing both in Maryland and (IF APPLICABLE) in the jurisdiction where it is
presently organized, and has filed all of its annual reports, together with filing fees, with the
Maryland State Department of Assessments and Taxation. The name and address of its resident
agent (IF APPLICABLE) filed with the State Department of Assessments and Taxation is:
Name and Department ID
Number:_____________________________Address:_______________________________
and that if it does business under a trade name, it has filed a certificate with the State Department
of Assessments and Taxation that correctly identifies that true name and address of the principal or
owner as:
Name and Department ID Number: ____________________________________________
Address:__________________________________________________.
1068
(Applicable to all contracts unless the contract is for a law enforcement agency and the agency
head or the agency heads designee has determined that application of COMAR 21.11.08 and this
certification would be inappropriate in connection with the law enforcement agencys undercover
operations.)
I CERTIFY THAT:
(1) Terms defined in COMAR 21.11.08 shall have the same meanings when used in this
certification.
(2) By submission of its bid or offer, the business, if other than an individual, certifies and
agrees that, with respect to its employees to be employed under a contract resulting from this
solicitation, the business shall:
1069
(g) Provide all employees engaged in the performance of the contract with a copy of the
statement required by E(2)(b), above;
(h) Notify its employees in the statement required by E(2)(b), above, that as a condition
of continued employment on the contract, the employee shall:
(i)
(ii)
(i) Notify the procurement officer within 10 days after receiving notice under E(2)(h)(ii),
above, or otherwise receiving actual notice of a conviction;
(j) Within 30 days after receiving notice under E(2)(h)(ii), above, or otherwise receiving
actual notice of a conviction, impose either of the following sanctions or remedial measures on
any employee who is convicted of a drug or alcohol abuse offense occurring in the workplace:
1070
(k) Make a good faith effort to maintain a drug and alcohol free workplace through
implementation of E(2)(a)(j), above.
(3) If the business is an individual, the individual shall certify and agree as set forth in E(4),
below, that the individual shall not engage in the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,
possession, or use of drugs or the abuse of drugs or alcohol in the performance of the contract.
(4) I acknowledge and agree that:
(a) The award of the contract is conditional upon compliance with COMAR 21.11.08 and
this certification;
(b) The violation of the provisions of COMAR 21.11.08 or this certification shall be cause
to suspend payments under, or terminate the contract for default under COMAR 21.07.01.11 or
21.07.03.15, as applicable; and
(c) The violation of the provisions of COMAR 21.11.08 or this certification in connection
with the contract may, in the exercise of the discretion of the Board of Public Works, result in
suspension and debarment of the business under COMAR 21.08.03.
F.
To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, each of the affirmations, certifications, or
acknowledgements contained in that certain Bid/Proposal Affidavit dated July 8, 2015 and executed
by me for the purpose of obtaining the contract to which this Exhibit is attached remains true and
correct in all respects as if made as of the date of this Contract Affidavit and as if fully set forth
herein.
1071
1072
Tax ID:
Address 1
Do you want to receive your
payments electronically?
Address 2
City
State
Yes
No
ZIP
Bank Name
Bank Address
City
State
ZIP
Checking
Money Market
ABA Number
Savings
Account No.
1073
Date
Remittance advice email addresses:
Printed Name
Telephone Number
1074
MARYLAND
DEPARTMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCES
HIRING AGREEMENT
Medicaid coverage for the employee and the employees dependents for up to one year
after placement in the job;
Maryland Childrens Health Program (MCHP) medical coverage for the employees
dependents after one year of employment for as long as eligibility is met;
Food Stamps for the employee and the employees dependents for as long as eligibility
requirements are met;
Child Care subsidies for the employees dependents for up to one year after
employment as long as eligibility requirements are met;
1075
Transportation subsidies for the employee for a period of time after employment;
WHEREAS, the Contractor and Department agree to work cooperatively to develop responses to the
workforce development requirements faced by the Contractor and to promote the hiring of the
Departments current and former Family Investment Program (FIP) recipients, their children, foster
youth, and child support obligors (Candidates) by the Contractor.
NOW THEREFORE, upon valuable consideration received, the Contractor and the Department
specifically agree as follows:
A. The CONTRACTOR shall:
1. Notify the Department of all job openings that exists or result from the Procurement Contract.
2. Declare the Department the first source in identifying and hiring Candidates for those
openings.
3. Work with Department to develop training programs that will enable Candidates to qualify for
and secure employment with the Contractor.
4. Give first preference and first consideration, to the extent permitted by law and any existing
labor agreements, to Candidates the Department refers.
5. Agree to give Candidates referred to the Contractor by the Department priority in the filling of
a job opening so long as the Candidate meets the qualifications of the position and the
Department refers qualified Candidates within three (3) working days.
6. Submit biannual reports (for the duration of the Contract) listing the number of all job openings
and the total number of individuals interviewed and hired under the Procurement Contract. The
report shall also include feedback regarding the disposition of referrals made, to include an
explanation of why any such Candidate was not hired or considered qualified.
1076
Name
Address
Telephone #
Fax #
who will:
provide additional information regarding first source jobs and clarify their requirements;
receive Department referrals, and
provide feedback to a Department account representative upon request regarding the
dispositions of those referrals as well as the progress/employment status of those
Candidates hired by the Contractor.
___________________________________
SIGNATURE
__________________________________
SIGNATURE
Type Title Here
TITLE
Program Administrator
TITLE
______________________
DATE
______________________
DATE
1078
1080
Penalties for Submitting False Information. If information provided by the business in the affidavit or
by other means is materially false, the bidder or offeror and the individual providing the false
information may be subject to criminal prosecution for perjury, procurement fraud, and other crimes
and may be subject to debarment, and all contract awards to the business in reliance upon the
inaccurate affidavit or other information may be void or subject to termination for default.
SMALL BUSINESS CERTIFICATION NUMBER __________
Date of Most Recent Qualification
__________
1081
This document MUST BE included with the bid. If the Bidder fails to complete and submit this form
with the bid, the Procurement Officer may determine that the bid is non-responsive.
In conjunction with the bid submitted in response to Solicitation No.
BB-2829-000-006, I affirm the following:
1.
I acknowledge and intend to meet the overall verified VSBE participation goal of One
Percent (1%). Therefore, I will not be seeking a waiver.
OR
I conclude that I am unable to achieve the VSBE participation goal. I hereby request a
waiver, in whole or in part, of the overall goal. Within ten (10) business days of receiving
notice that our firm is the apparent awardee, I will submit all required waiver
documentation in accordance with COMAR 21.11.13.07.
2. I understand that if I am notified that I am the apparent awardee, I must submit the following
additional documentation within ten (10) working days of receiving notice of the apparent award or
from the date of conditional award (per COMAR 21.11.13.06), whichever is earlier.
I understand that if I fail to return each completed document within the required time, the
Procurement Officer may determine that I am not responsible and therefore not eligible for contract
award. If the contract has already been awarded, the award is voidable.
3. In the solicitation of subcontract quotations or offers, VSBE subcontractors were provided not less
than the same information and amount of time to respond as were non-VSBE subcontractors.
4.
Set forth below are the (i) verified VSBEs I intend to use and (ii) the percentage of the total
contract amount allocated to each VSBE for this project. I hereby affirm that the VSBE firms are
only providing those products and services for which they are verified.
1082
Prime Contractor:
(Firm Name, Address, Phone)
Project Description:
Project number:
DUNS Number
DUNS Number
DUNS Number
DUNS Number
SUMMARY
Total VSBE Participation: _____ %
I solemnly affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of this Affidavit are true to the best of
my knowledge, information, and belief.
_____________________________________
Bidder Name
_______________________________
Signature of Affiant
NAME: _____________________________
TITLE: _____________________________
DATE: ______________________________
1083
Please complete and submit one form for each verified VSBE listed on the VSBE Utilization Affidavit within 10
working days of notification of apparent award.
_________________________ (prime contractor) has entered into a contract with _________________________
(subcontractor) to provide services in connection with the Solicitation described below.
Project Description
Project Number
DUNS Number
Work To Be Performed
The undersigned Prime Contractor and Subcontractor hereby certify and agree that they have fully
complied with the State Veteran-Owned Small Business Enterprise law, State Finance and
Procurement Article, Title 14, Subtitle 6, Annotated Code of Maryland.
PRIME CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE SUBCONTRACTOR SIGNATURE
By:
________________________________
Name, Title
By:
Date
_________________________________
Name, Title
Date
1084
1085
1086
PHONE: 410.767.2342
LARRY HOGAN, GOVERNOR
FAX: 410-767-2986
.
www.dllr.maryland.gov/labor/prev
.
II.
Once you have successfully registered, you can proceed with the submittal of payroll
records electronically by following these steps:
1. Sign-In
1088
4. Enter Deductions
6. Prepare to Submit
Choose Back to Edit this Payroll Record if there are corrections to be made to the completed payroll record.
Choose Add Next Payroll Record if there are other employees to enter
FINALLY, choose Submit Payroll Data if you have completed payroll session.
NOTE: This is a reporting system for compliance with the States prevailing wage law. IT IS
NOT AN ACCOUNTING SYSTEM, IT IS A REPORTING SYSTEM.
1089
1. If you have responded with a "no bid", please indicate the reason(s) below:
( ) Other commitments preclude our participation at this time.
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
( )
( )
( )
( )
2. If you have submitted a bid, but wish to offer suggestions or express concerns, please use the
Remarks section below. (Use reverse or attach additional pages as needed.)
REMARKS: ________________________________________________________________________
Contractors Name: ___________________________________ Date: ________________
Contact Person: _____________________________________ Phone: (____) _____ - ______
Address:_____________________________________________________________________
1090
05-07-13
1096
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1106
II.
A.
B.
All Contractors shall comply with the Governor's Code of Fair Employment
Practices, Promulgated July, 1976. (Exec. Order No. 01.01.2007.16, COMAR
01.01.2007.16) The Contractor shall include these requirements in every subcontract
with such modifications of language as is necessary to make these provisions binding
on the subcontractor.
C.
Applicability
A.
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
2.
All new supervisory and personnel office employees are to be made aware of the
Contractor's EEO policy and plan as soon as practicable, but certainly within thirty
(30) days following the date of first reporting for duty.
3.
The Contractor will make its EEO policy known to all employees, prospective
employees, and potential sources of employees, through schools, employment
agencies, labor unions, college placement officers, etc., by taking the following
actions:
a.
Notice and posters setting forth the Contractor's EEO policy will be placed in
areas readily accessible to employees and applicants for employment.
b.
The Contractor's EEO policy and the procedures for implementing the EEO
policy will be brought to the attention of employees through meetings,
employee handbooks, or other appropriate means.
1113
The Contractor will include in all advertising the following notation: An Equal
Opportunity Employer. The Contractor will insert such advertisement in newspapers or
other publications having large circulation among minorities and females in the area from
which the project work is derived.
The Contractor will, unless precluded by a valid collective bargaining agreement, conduct
systematic and direct recruitment through public and private employee referral sources
likely to yield qualified minority and female applicants, including, but not limited to, State
Employment agencies, school, college and minority/female organizations, i.e., The Urban
League, NAACP, etc. To meet this requirement, the Contractor shall identify sources of
potential minority/female employees and establish with such sources procedures whereby
minority/female applicants may be referred to it for employment consideration.
The Contractor will develop procedures for promoting the employment of minority/female
youth on an after-school, summer and vacation basis.
The Contractor will encourage its employees to refer minority/female applicants for
employment by posting appropriate notices or bulletins in areas accessible to all such
employees. In addition, information and procedures with regard to referring
minority/female applicants will be discussed with employees.
1114
Periodic inspections of project sites to ensure that working conditions and employee
facilities do not indicate discriminatory practices.
Periodic evaluations of the spread of wages paid within each classification to determine
whether there is any evidence of discriminatory wage practices.
Periodic reviews of personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is any evidence of
discrimination. Where evidence is found, the Contractor will promptly take corrective
action.
1. Investigations of all complaints of alleged discrimination attempts in order to
resolve such complaints. Additionally, if the investigation indicates that the
discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, then
appropriate corrective actions will include those other persons. Upon
completion of each investigation, the Contractor will inform every
complainant of all avenues of appeal.
1115
Contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minority/female
employees and applicants for employment.
Contractor will advise both employees and applicants for employment of available training
programs and entrance requirements for the program.
Contractor will periodically review the training and promotion potential of minority/female
employees and shall encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and
promotions.
1116
Use good faith efforts to develop, in cooperation with the unions, joint training
programs aimed at qualifying more minorities/females for membership in the unions
and increasing their skills so they may qualify for higher paying employment; and
B.
1117
The Contractor will use good faith efforts to employ subcontractors whose employees reflect
minority/female groups approximately equal to the number available in the current labor
pool populations, or owned by minority/female.
The Contractor will use good faith efforts to assure that all subcontractors comply with
equal employment obligations as defined in the amended Governors Code of Fair
Employment Practices. (Exec. Order No. 01.01.2007.16; COMAR 01.01.2007.16)
1118
The number of minority/female and other persons employed in each work classification of
the project.
The progress and efforts being made in cooperation with unions, if any, to increase
minority/female employment opportunities.
The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading
minority/female employees.
The progress and efforts being made in securing the services of minority/female
subcontractors.
All such records will be retained for a period of three (3) years following completion of the
Contract work and shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized
representatives of the Maryland Transportation Authority.
The Contractor will submit to the Authority a monthly report for every month after
construction begins and, and thereafter, upon request for the duration of the project. This report
shall indicate the number of minority/female employees currently engaged in each work
classification.
1119
1120
1121
3 of 12
4. Hispanic An individual of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American,
Portuguese or other Spanish culture or origin regardless of race, and who is regarded as such
by the community or which the person claims to be a part;
5. Women This category shall include all women, regardless of race or ethnicity, although a
woman who is also a member of an ethnic or racial minority group may elect that category
in lieu of the gender category; or
6. Physically or Mentally Disabled An individual who has an impairment that substantially
limits one or more major life activity, who is regarded generally by the community as
having such a disability, and whose disability has substantially limited his or her ability to
engage in competitive business.
Regular Dealer - A firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, warehouse, or other
establishment in which the materials or supplies required for the performance of the contract are
bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business.
To be a regular dealer, the firm must engage in, as its principal business, and in its own name, the
purchase and sale of the products in question. A regular dealer in such bulk items as cement, gravel,
stone and petroleum need not keep such products in stock, if it owns or operates distribution
equipment. Brokers and packagers shall not be regarded as manufacturers or regular dealers within
the meaning of this section.
A regular dealer must be engaged in selling the product in question to the public. This is important
in distinguishing a Regular Dealer, which has a regular trade with a variety of customers, from a
firm which performs supply-like functions on an ad-hoc basis or for only one or two contractors
with whom it has a special relationship.
A business that simply transfer title of a product from manufacturer to ultimate purchaser (e.g.
broker or sales representative who re-invoices a product from the producing company to the
recipient or contractor) or a firm that puts a product in a container for deliver would not be
considered a Regular Dealer.
A supplier of bulk goods may qualify as a regular dealer if it either maintains an inventory or owns
or operates distribution equipment. With respect to the distribution equipment (e.g. a fleet of
trucks), the term operates is intended to cover a situation in which the supplier leases the
equipment on a regular basis for its entire business. It is not intended to cover a situation in the firm
simply provides drivers for trucks owned or leased by another party, (e.g., a prime contractor) or
leases such as partys trucks on an ad-hoc basis for a specific job.
Supplier A regular dealer, who owns, operates, or maintains a store, warehouse, or other
establishment in which the material or supplies required for the performance of a contract are
placed, kept in stock, and regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business.
1123
4 of 12
The supplier must perform a commercially useful function consistent with normal industry
practices. To be a regular dealer, the firm must engage in, as its principal businesses, and in its own
name, the purchase and sale of the products in question.
A supplier of bulk goods (Cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum products) may qualify as a regular
dealer if it either maintains an inventory or owns or operates distribution equipment. With respect
to the distribution equipment (A fleet of trucks), the term operates is intended to cover a situation
in which the supplier leases the equipment on a regular basis for its entire business. It is not
intended to cover a situation in which the firm simply provides drivers for trucks owned or leased
by another party, (such as a prime contractor) or leases such a partys trucks on an ad-hoc basis for
a specific job.
Third Tier Contracting The process in which a prime contractor subcontracts a portion of an
original contract to a subcontractor who in turn subcontracts a portion of a subcontract to a third
party. This latter action is termed entering into a third tier contract agreement.
B. MBE and Good Faith Effort Requirements
1. This contract includes an MBE participation goal for subcontracting, and/or procurement of
materials, and/or services. Bidders/Offerors must make a good faith effort to meet the MBE
participation goal before bids or proposals are due, including outreach efforts. A bid or
initial proposal must include both a completed and executed MDOT MBE Form A, Certified
MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and MDOT MBE Form B, MBE
Participation Schedule. The failure of a bidder to complete and submit MDOT MBE Form
A, Certified MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and MDOT MBE Form B,
MBE Participation Schedule shall result in a determination that the bid is not responsive.
The failure of an offeror to complete and submit MDOT MBE Form A, Certified MBE
Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and MDOT MBE Form B, MBE Participation
Schedule shall result in a determination that the proposal is not susceptible of being selected
for award.
2. In Accordance to COMAR 21.11.03.10;C(2) In making a good faith effort to achieve the
MBE goal, prior to completing MDOT MBE Form A, Certified MBE Utilization and Fair
Solicitation Affidavit and MDOT MBE Form B, MBE Participation Schedule and prior to
submitting a bid or initial proposal bidders (or offerors) including those bidders or offerors
that are certified MBEs must:
a. Identify specific work categories within the scope of the procurement appropriate for
subcontracting and/or procurement of materials and/or services;
b. Solicit certified MBEs in writing at least 10 days before bids or initial proposals are
due, describing the identified work categories and providing instructions on how to bid
on the subcontracts and/or procurement of materials and/or services;
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
All such records and reports shall be retained for a period of three years following
acceptance of final payment and shall be available for inspection by the Maryland
Department of Transportation and this Administration.
1129
Failure to submit each monthly payment report in full compliance with COMAR
21.11.03.13B (3): $23.00 per day until the monthly report is submitted as required.
B.
C.
D.
Failure to meet the Contractors total MBE participation goal and subgoal
commitments: the difference between the dollar value of the total MBE participation
commitment on the MBE participation schedule and the MBE participation actually
achieved.
Notwithstanding the use of liquidated damages, the MDTA reserves the right to terminate the
contract and exercise all other rights and remedies provided in the contract or by law.
1130
1131
The
1132
1133